Danelec Business System

User's Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................................6
1.1 User Manual Structure ........................................................................................................................6
1.2 Typographic Conventions ...................................................................................................................6
1.3 Normative References ........................................................................................................................6
1.4 New Feature Highlights.......................................................................................................................7
2. ECDIS INTERFACE .................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Starting and Terminating the ECDIS...................................................................................................8
2.2 Main Window.......................................................................................................................................8
2.3 Indicators Panel ..................................................................................................................................8
2.4 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Panel ..................................................................................12
2.5 Functional Buttons Menu ..................................................................................................................13
2.6 Functional Panels..............................................................................................................................13
2.7 On-Screen Keyboard ........................................................................................................................14
2.8 Hotkeys List.......................................................................................................................................15
3. ECDIS SETUP .......................................................................................................................................16
3.1 Input/Output ......................................................................................................................................16
3.1.1 Adding, editing and deleting input/output devices..................................................................16
3.1.2 Monitoring serial line...............................................................................................................18
3.2 Own Ship Data ..................................................................................................................................18
3.3 System Setup....................................................................................................................................20
3.3.1 Measurement Units and Time ................................................................................................20
3.3.2 User Interface Language Setup .............................................................................................21
3.3.3 Volume Setup .........................................................................................................................21
3.3.4 System Check-up ...................................................................................................................21
3.3.5 System Information.................................................................................................................22
3.3.6 Color Differentiation Test........................................................................................................22
3.4 Updating ECDIS Software.................................................................................................................23
3.5 Data Synchronization ........................................................................................................................23
3.5.1 Synchronization Setup ...........................................................................................................23
3.5.2 Synchronization Monitor .........................................................................................................24
3.5.3 Routes Synchronization .........................................................................................................26
3.6 System Diagnostics Tools.................................................................................................................26
4. INSTALLING DATA................................................................................................................................28
4.1 Installing and Displaying Databases .................................................................................................28
4.1.1 Installing Databases ...............................................................................................................28
4.1.2 Displaying Databases.............................................................................................................29
4.2 Licensing Data ..................................................................................................................................30
4.2.1 Installing Licenses Manually...................................................................................................30
4.2.2 Installing Licenses from File ...................................................................................................31
4.2.3 Viewing Installed Licenses .....................................................................................................31
4.2.4 Dynamic Licensing .................................................................................................................32
4.3 Installing New Version of the Database ............................................................................................33
4.4 Licensing Software Modules .............................................................................................................34
4.5 ENC Data in S-57 Format .................................................................................................................34
4.5.1 S-63 Protection of ENC Data .................................................................................................34
4.5.2 Large Media Support ..............................................................................................................37
4.5.3 Import S-57 to CM93v3 ..........................................................................................................38
4.5.4 Updating Imported S-57 Data.................................................................................................39
Last update December 11, 2012 2

5. CHARTS DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................40
5.1 Moving around the Chart View..........................................................................................................40
5.2 Scaling the Chart View......................................................................................................................41
5.3 Bookmarks ........................................................................................................................................43
5.4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend ...................................................................................43
5.5 Additional Chart Windows .................................................................................................................44
5.5.1 Look-ahead Window...............................................................................................................44
5.5.2 3D Window .............................................................................................................................45
5.6 Setting up Chart Display ...................................................................................................................47
5.6.1 Chart Presentation Models.....................................................................................................47
5.6.2 Display Type...........................................................................................................................48
5.6.3 Supplementary Data...............................................................................................................50
5.6.4 Depth Areas Presentation ......................................................................................................51
5.6.5 Depth Settings ........................................................................................................................52
5.6.6 Text Settings...........................................................................................................................53
5.6.7 Other Settings.........................................................................................................................54
5.7 Printing Charts ..................................................................................................................................55
6. VOYAGE PREPARATION .....................................................................................................................56
6.1 Correcting the Chart..........................................................................................................................56
6.1.1 Automatic Updating ................................................................................................................56
6.1.2 Semi-automatic Updating .......................................................................................................56
6.1.3 Updating Log/Review Updates...............................................................................................57
6.1.4 Manual Updating ....................................................................................................................58
6.2 Mariner Objects.................................................................................................................................62
6.2.1 Creating and Editing Mariner Objects ....................................................................................64
6.2.2 Export/Import of Mariner Objects ...........................................................................................66
6.3 Charts Catalogue ..............................................................................................................................67
6.3.1 Searching Charts Catalogue ..................................................................................................67
6.3.2 Viewing Chart Boundaries by Scale Levels ...........................................................................68
6.4 Route Planning and Plotting .............................................................................................................69
6.4.1 Automatic Route Planning......................................................................................................69
6.4.2 Manual Route Planning ..........................................................................................................72
6.4.3 Route Edit Mode.....................................................................................................................74
6.4.4 Route Plan..............................................................................................................................76
6.4.5 Adding Critical Points .............................................................................................................77
6.4.6 Editing Route Schedule..........................................................................................................78
6.4.7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File....................................................................79
6.4.8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a Device...............................................................80
6.5 Tides and Tidal Streams Data ..........................................................................................................81
6.5.1 Tides Information....................................................................................................................81
6.5.2 Tidal Streams Information ......................................................................................................82
6.5.3 Astronomical Information........................................................................................................84
6.6 Weather Forecast: Download ...........................................................................................................85
6.6.1 Weather Subscription .............................................................................................................85
6.6.2 Easy Mode Setup and Download ...........................................................................................88
6.6.3 Overview and Coastal Download ...........................................................................................91
6.6.4 Custom Download ..................................................................................................................93
6.6.5 Scheduled Download .............................................................................................................94
6.6.6 Weather Packages Handling..................................................................................................96
6.6.7 Weather Download Setup ......................................................................................................97

6.7 Weather Forecast: Display..............................................................................................................101
6.7.1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data ...................................................101
6.7.2 Display of Cyclones ..............................................................................................................104
6.7.3 Display of Ice Situation .........................................................................................................105
6.7.4 Weather Time Series............................................................................................................106
6.7.5 Weather Alarm Area .............................................................................................................108
6.7.6 Comparison of Routes..........................................................................................................109
6.7.7 Inspect Ship Position ............................................................................................................110
6.8 Piracy Information ...........................................................................................................................113
7. NAVIGATION .......................................................................................................................................114
7.1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track.............................................................................................114
7.2 Position Sources .............................................................................................................................116
7.2.1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources............................................................................116
7.2.2 Dead Reckoning ...................................................................................................................117
7.2.3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs ...............................................................117
7.2.4 Position Correction ...............................................................................................................123
7.2.5 Position Discrepancies .........................................................................................................124
7.3 Heading Sources.............................................................................................................................124
7.4 Navigational Data Display and Sources..........................................................................................125
7.4.1 Navigational Panel................................................................................................................125
7.4.2 Navigational Data Sources...................................................................................................126
7.4.3 Wind Sensor Data ................................................................................................................126
7.5 Navigational Chart Settings ............................................................................................................127
7.5.1 Navigation Mode...................................................................................................................127
7.5.2 Best Scale Mode ..................................................................................................................127
7.5.3 Chart Display Palettes ..........................................................................................................128
7.5.4 Chart Orientation ..................................................................................................................128
7.5.5 True and Relative Motion .....................................................................................................129
7.5.6 Light Sectors.........................................................................................................................129
7.6 Alarms .............................................................................................................................................130
7.6.1 Alarms and Warnings Panel.................................................................................................131
7.6.2 Antigrounding Alarm .............................................................................................................132
7.6.3 Alarms ..................................................................................................................................133
7.6.4 Alarm Conditions List............................................................................................................134
7.7 Route Monitoring.............................................................................................................................135
7.7.1 Route Monitoring Mode ........................................................................................................135
7.7.2 Route Monitoring Panel........................................................................................................136
7.7.3 Go to Waypoint Function......................................................................................................137
8. NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOLS ...........................................................................................138
8.1 Echo Sounder .................................................................................................................................138
8.2 AIS...................................................................................................................................................139
8.2.1 AIS Targets Data ..................................................................................................................139
8.2.2 AIS Targets Display Settings................................................................................................142
8.3 ARPA...............................................................................................................................................146
8.3.1 ARPA Targets Data ..............................................................................................................146
8.3.2 ARPA Targets Display..........................................................................................................147
8.4 Radar Image Overlay ......................................................................................................................148
8.5 Anti-collision Display .......................................................................................................................149
8.5.1 Theoretical Principles of the Anti-collision Display...............................................................150
8.5.2 Graphic Elements of the Anti-collision Display.....................................................................158

8.5.3 Configuration of the Anti-collision Display ............................................................................158
8.5.4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits...........................159
8.5.5 Indication of Collision Risk ...................................................................................................160
8.5.6 Example and Recommendations for the Anti-collision Display Use ....................................161
9. OTHER NAVIGATIONAL TOOLS........................................................................................................169
9.1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects .....................................................................169
9.1.1 ERBL ....................................................................................................................................169
9.1.2 Check Points ........................................................................................................................170
9.1.3 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer ............................................................................170
9.2 Man Overboard and Position Fix ....................................................................................................171
9.2.1 Man Overboard Functionality ...............................................................................................171
9.2.2 Position Fix Functionality......................................................................................................171
9.3 Log Book .........................................................................................................................................171
9.3.1 Viewing Log Book Entries ....................................................................................................171
9.3.2 Log Book Play-Back .............................................................................................................174
9.4 Navi Calculator................................................................................................................................175
APPENDIX A List of Input Sentences.....................................................................................................177
APPENDIX B List of Output Sentences..................................................................................................189
APPENDIX C Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs ..............190
Glossary..........................................................................................................................................................195
Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................202
Page Index .....................................................................................................................................................204

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 User Manual Structure
The ECDIS User Manual contains detailed information about all functions of the ECDIS.
The user manual consists of eight chapters each containing a number of sub-chapters. Each chapter
presents information on how to perform specific tasks using the ECDIS. The order of chapters is determined
by the order of tasks that the user faces when navigating at sea.
1.2 Typographic Conventions
The ECDIS User Manual is written under assumption that the user is familiar with the main principles of work
in the MS Windows environment and has experience in using MS Windows applications.
This manual uses certain conventions to provide a consistent means of recognizing specific information, as
follows:
‘Keys’ are physical keys of the computer keyboard.
‘Buttons’ are displayed graphically on the screen.
Text written like Chart refers to the names of keys and buttons as well as the names of all other user
interface elements.
Program messages are written like this: ‘Would you like to copy the database to a local hard disk?’
Text written like Data Æ Licensing Æ Add License manually is contracted from “press the Data button,
open the Licensing panel and press the Add License manually button,” and presents a sequence of
commands that user should perform to reach a function.
IMPORTANT!
Information that is crucial for correct functioning of the system or a function is marked by the word
“Important” and solid lines above and below the text.
1.3 Normative References

The ECDIS is created in compliance with the following international standards:
• IEC 60945 ed.4 – 2002, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems –
General requirements – Methods of testing and required test results
• IEC 61161-1 ed.4 – 2010, Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems
–Digital interfaces, Part 1: Single talker and multiple listeners
Presentation of navigation-related information on shipborne navigational displays – General
requirements, methods of testing and required test results
Electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) – Operational and performance
requirements, methods of testing and required test results
• IHO S-52 ed.6.0 – Presentation Library v.3.4, Specifications for chart content and display aspects of
ECDIS
• IHO S-57 ed.3.1(.2) – 2000 + 2014, IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data
• IHO S-63 ed.1.1.1 – 2012, IHO data protection scheme
• ITU-R 1371-1, Technical characteristics for an automatic identification system using time division
multiple access in the VHF maritime mobile band

• MSC.192 2004, Adoption of the revised performance standards for radar equipmentю
1.4 New Feature Highlights
As compared to the previous version of the program of 5.0.83, the following new functionalities have been
implemented with the 5.0.84 version, Table 1.
Table 1 New features in 5.0.84 version
Function Reference
Extended time range for display of weather data “Weather Time Series” on page 106.
Image overlay supported of data from two independent radars “Radar Image Overlay” on page 148
Extra functionalities for AIS target monitoring, including safety
issues, in particular:
Meeting point located on the chart
New target type recognition “AIS” on page 139.
Meet target calculations and indicators on the chart
System diagnostic utility implemented “System Diagnostics Tools” on page 26.
The function abolished to read the value of the vertical offset “Echo Sounder” on page 138.
of the echsounder from DPT sentences
RTE and WPL remain as the only supported outgoing AIS APPENDIX B
sentence types

2. ECDIS INTERFACE
2.1 Starting and Terminating the ECDIS
To start the ECDIS application, turn the system power on. To terminate the application press the Close
button in the upper right corner of the application window. The termination of the application turns the system
power off.
2.2 Main Window
The ECDIS starting window looks as follows:
Figure 1 ECDIS Main window

2.3 Indicators Panel
Figure 2 Indicators panel
¾ Position Source indicator has the following states:

The Position Source indicator is situated in the Navigational panel. It indicates which position source is
being used at the moment for displaying the own ship symbol in the chart view. The indicator turns orange if
the Primary Position Source fails and the Secondary Position Source is used (see chapter 7.2.1, Primary and
Secondary Position Sources).
The currently used position source is a GPS receiver set as the

primary or secondary position source in the Navi Æ Navigation
Data tab, Position Sources tab. The indicator displays the name
of the position source as it is registered in the Config Æ
Input/Output tab.
The currently used positioning method is dead reckoning (see

chapter 7.2.2, Dead Reckoning).
¾ Source Scale indicator has the following states:

The Source Scale indicator turns orange if the scale of the current chart (the chart under the own ship or
under the center of the chart view) is twice or more as large or as small as the original chart scale.
The current chart scale is not twice as large or as small as the original chart scale (for
example the original scale is 1:100 000 and the current scale is 1:75 000).
The current chart scale is twice as large as the original chart scale (for example the
original scale is 1:100 000 and the current scale is 1:50 000).
The current chart scale is twice as small as the original chart scale (for example the
original scale is 1:100 000 and the current scale is 1:200 000).
¾ Scale Status indicator has the following states:

The Scale Status indicator shows if there are charts of larger scale for the current own ship position. The
indicator operates only when in navigation mode.
The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area and the best scale mode is on (see
chapter 7.5.2, Best Scale Mode). To turn the best scale mode off, left-click on the
indicator.
The current chart is the largest scale chart for the area but the best scale mode is off. To
turn the best scale mode on, left-click on the indicator.
There are larger scale charts for the area.
¾ Navigation Mode indicator has the following states:

The Navigation Mode indicator shows if the navigation mode is on or off. Left-click on the indicator to turn
the Navigation mode on or off. The indicator also shows other ECDIS modes that are currently on.
The navigation mode is on.
The navigation mode is off.
The mariners' objects edit mode is on.
The route edit mode is on.

¾ Data Display Type indicator has the following states:

The Data Display Type indicator shows which data display type is currently on (see chapter 5.6.2, Display
Type).
The Base display type is on. To switch to the Standard display type, left-click on the
indicator.
In addition to Base display objects, chart presentation settings adding elements to the
chart view are on (the Chart – Chart Presentation tab).
The Standard display type is on. To switch to the All other display type, left-click on the
indicator.
In addition to Standard display objects, chart presentation settings adding elements to the
chart view are on (the Chart – Chart Presentation tab).
The All other display type is on. All cartographic information available from the chart is
displayed.
The Custom display type is on. To switch to the Standard display type, left-click on the
indicator.
¾ Navigation Info indicator has the following states:

The Nav Info indicator switches the current display type to Base display, turns off chart presentation settings
not required for the Base display, and removes all additional navigation information (radar, AIS targets,
ARPA targets) from the chart view.
All navigation information is displayed. Left-click on the indicator to remove the

information from the chart view.
No navigation information is displayed. Left-click on the indicator to restore the last

display state.
¾ Periodic Date indicator has the following states:

The Periodic Date indicator shows if objects which are active only in specific periods of time during the year
are displayed only in the periods when they are active (the indicator is green) or are always displayed in the
chart view disregarding their activity periods (the indicator is orange); see chapter 5.6.7, Other Settings:
Periodic date.
The Periodic date setting is set.
The Periodic date setting is not set.
¾ Radar Display indicator has the following states:

The Radar Display indicator shows if the radar image display is on or off (see chapter 8.4, Radar Image
Overlay). Left-click on the indicator to turn the radar image display on or off.
The radar image display is on.
The radar image display is off.

¾ AIS Targets Display indicator has the following states:

The AIS Targets Display indicator shows if the AIS targets display is on or off (see chapter 8.2.2, AIS
Targets Display). Left-click on the indicator to turn the AIS targets display on or off.
The AIS targets display is on.
The AIS targets display is off.
¾ ARPA Targets Display indicator has the following states:

The ARPA Targets Display indicator shows if the ARPA targets display is on or off (see chapter 8.2.2, AIS
Targets Display). Left-click on the indicator to turn the ARPA targets display on or off.
The ARPA targets display is on.
The ARPA targets display is off.
¾ Dangers and Cautions indicator has the following states:

The Dangers and Cautions indicator shows if there are dangerous objects or cautions inside the Guard
Zone (see chapter 7.6.2, Antigrounding Alarm).
There are no dangers in the guard zone or the anti-grounding alarm function is off.
There are dangerous objects inside the guard zone. Left-click on the indicator to open the
Dangers and Cautions panel. Dangers list is displayed in the Dangers tab.
There are cautions inside the guard zone. Left-click on the indicator to open the Dangers
and Cautions panel. Cautions list is displayed in the Cautions tab.
¾ Voyage indicator has the following states:

When in the route monitoring mode (the voyage has been started), the Voyage indicator displays warnings
regarding the own ship proceeding along the route (see chapter 7.7, Route Monitoring).
The route monitoring mode is off.
The own ship is on the route.
The own ship course deviates from the route course.
The deviation from the route (XTE) is more than the set value. Own ship is too far from
the route.
The indicator notifies that the own ship is approaching a waypoint. Set the time before the
waypoint at which the ECDIS will notify you using the Pre-turn Warning setting in the
Route Æ Start Voyage Æ Settings tab.
The indicator also notifies that own ship is approaching a waypoint. The indicator is
supposed to prompt the mariner to start turning. Set the time before the waypoint using
the Pre-turn Acknowledgement setting in the Route Æ Start Voyage Æ Settings tab.

Own ship is at the waypoint and must turn to take the next leg course.
Own ship does not move or moves in the direction opposite to the direction of the route.
Own ship reached the voyage destination point.
¾ System Warnings indicator has the following states:

The System Warnings indicator notifies the user about the caution conditions (see chapter 7.6, Alarms).
There are no caution conditions currently.
If the cautions indicator is yellow, there is a caution condition. To view caution conditions,
left-click on the indicator. The Alarms and Cautions panel will open.
¾ Alarms indicator has the following states:

The Alarms indicator notifies the user about the alarm conditions (see chapter 7.6, Alarms).
There are no alarm conditions currently. The alarm conditions

indicator, where descriptions of alarms are displayed, is empty.
If the alarm indicator is flashing red, there is an alarm condition.

Descriptions of alarm conditions are displayed in the alarm
conditions indicator. To acknowledge a condition, left-click on the
alarm conditions indicator. To open the alarms panel, left-click on
the alarms indicator. In the panel, the list of all current alarms is
displayed.
2.4 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Panel

Move the pointer over the scale indicator to expand the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel:
Figure 3 Quick access panel

The quick access buttons provide operative access to specific ECDIS functions.
The Man Overboard button plots a MOB (man overboard) position symbol on the chart at the
own ship current position.
The Fix on ship position button plots a fix position symbol on the chart at the own ship current
position.
The ERBL tool button launches the electronic range and bearing measurement tool (ERBL).
The Check Points tool button opens the Check Points tool.
2.5 Functional Buttons Menu

The functional buttons menu is made up of eight buttons each opening a functional panel. To open the
buttons menu, move the mouse pointer over the Menu indicator in the lower right corner of the chart view.
The menu stays open while the mouse pointer is hovering over the menu. When the mouse pointer is out of
the menu, it is collapsed automatically.
To open a panel, press the corresponding button. Only one functional panel can be opened at a time. To
switch to another panel, press the button opening the other panel. To close an opened panel, outpress its
button.
Opens the Chart functional panel holding the following tabs: Chart Settings, Chart
Presentation, Mariner Objects, and Manual Update.
Opens the Route functional panel holding the following tabs: Start Voyage, Route
Planning, Go To, Route Finder, and Export/Import.
Opens the Info functional panel holding the following tabs: Echo Sounder Diagram, AIS
Monitor, Targets, Radar Image, System Info, Astro Info, Tides Info, Streams Info,
Navi Calculator, and Synchronization Monitor.
Opens the Log Book functional panel.
Opens the Navi functional panel holding the following tabs: Navigation Data, Own ship
past track and vector, Dead Reckoning, and LOP Position fix.
Opens the Data functional panel holding the following tabs: Chart Catalogue,
Add/Remove Database, Licensing, Dynamic Licensing, Databases, Auto Updating,
and Import S57.
Opens the Config functional panel holding the following tabs: System, Alarm Setup,
AIS, Targets, Anti Collision Tool, Own ship, Input/Output, and Units and Time.
Opens the Weather functional panel holding the following tabs: Weather Presentation
(Easy Mode), Weather Presentation, Weather Alarm Area, Weather Time Series, and
Weather Packages.
2.6 Functional Panels

Functional panels hold tools used to setup and execute main ECDIS functions. To open a functional panel,
use a button from the Functional Buttons Menu. To close a panel, outpress its button in the Functional
Buttons Menu or use the Close Panel button.
Each panel may contain several tabs and sub-tabs. Each panel also has a set of buttons with general
functions.

Clear Highlight – removes highlighting from the chart view. Highlighting made by any function
can be removed from the chart view using the general Clear Highlight button.
Restore Down – restores the functional panel to its default size. To resize a panel, move the
mouse pointer to the upper border of the panel and when it changes to the resize pointer ,
drag the panel up.
Auto Hide – pins the panel down. If the panel is not pinned down, it is reduced so that to display
only its tabs names after the mouse pointer is removed from the panel. To pin the panel down,
press the Auto Hide button. When the pin on the button is vertical, the panel is pinned down;
when the pin is horizontal, the auto hide mode is on and the panel collapses after you move the
mouse pointer out of it.
Back to previous chart view – restores the previous chart view (coordinates and scale).
Close panel – closes the panel.
The buttons are located in the upper right corner of each panel.
Figure 4 Clear Highlight, Restore Down, Auto Hide, Back, and Close panel buttons
2.7 On-Screen Keyboard
To turn the on-screen keyboard on do the following:
1. In the Config Æ System tab, set the On-screen keyboard check box. The Keyboard button will appear
in the lower-right corner near the Menu button.
2. Press the Keyboard button. A keyboard will appear.
Figure 5 On screen keyboard

3. Place the insertion point to a field where you need to enter information and use the on-screen keyboard
to type the text.
4. To close the on-screen keyboard, press the Close button in the upper-right corner of the keyboard.

2.8 Hotkeys List

The following hotkeys are used in the ECDIS:
Table 2 Hot keys
Key Effect
F8 MOB mode On
F9 Switch Standard/All Other display types
F12 Switch palettes Night/Day
Page up Zoom in
Page Zoom out

down

3. ECDIS SETUP
3.1 Input/Output
Data about the own vessel position, course, speed and other vessel movement characteristics, as well as
the data about the surrounding conditions are received using special navigation devices such as positioning
devices, gyro devices, and other sensors – input devices. The data received from the input devices is
processed and presented in the ECDIS application. The data can also be transmitted to other devices such
as autopilot, ARPA display and others – output devices. For the data to be received and transmitted by the
ECDIS application, the input and output sensors must be connected to the system using the system COM
and USB ports and registered in the ECDIS application.
3.1.1 Adding, editing and deleting input/output devices
IMPORTANT!
The input/output configuration is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password.
The input/output configuration requires separate licensing. Make sure that the ECDIS I/O license for the
software module is installed on your system 1 .
Registration of input and output navigation devices is carried out in the Config Æ Input/Output tab. To
register a device, add it to the Talkers list.
Figure 6 Config Æ Input/Output tab

To add a new talker, do the following:
1. To add an input/output device, press the New button. The Talker Setup dialog opens.
Figure 7 Talker Setup dialog
1
A special input/output configuration file io.lines.xml may be used for input/output setup. The file contains description of
communication lines and is located in the [C:\ECDISDATA\Config\] folder. If the file is used, the input/output interface is
slightly different than that without the configuration file. The differences will be described as special notes in specific
features descriptions.

2. Set the device parameters in the Talker Setup dialog.
• Device Name – Name of the transmitting device.
• Device Type – Choose the type of the transmitting device from the drop-down list.
• TalkerID – Talker identification.
• Communication line/Baud rate – Select the communication channel and the channel baud rate
from the corresponding drop-down lists.
• Retransmission line/Baud rate – Select the retransmission communication channel and the
channel baud rate from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the function if you want to
retransmit received AIS messages to other computers connected to your computer through a
network.
• Time Out – The timeout before an alarm is given after the signal from the device is lost.
• Ignore CRC – When receiving sentences from a device, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) is used to
check the sentences checksum. If an error in checksum is detected, an alarm is given and
displayed in the Alarm conditions indicator and the sentence is not received. To ignore CRC errors
for a device, check the Ignore CRC checkbox. If the checkbox is set, an alarm is still given in case
of a CRC error, but the sentence is received.
NOTE: if an io.lines.xml configuration file is used, the Communication line/Baud rate and
Retransmission line/Baud rate settings are replaced with the Communication line name and
Retransmission line name settings. To set both of the settings, select an option from the drop-down
lists.
Figure 8 Talker Setup dialog, interface for the io.lines.xml configuration file
3. In the Listen For section, check the message types which the ECDIS application will listen to and parse.
If no message type is selected, the ECDIS will parse all types of messages coming from the device.
4. Press the Apply button to add the device to the devices list or Cancel to cancel the operation 2 .
5. After the device has been added to the devices list press the Save Settings button in the Config Æ
Input/Output tab for the changes to take effect.
6. Enter the password in the Password required dialog and press OK. The changes will take effect.
To edit parameters of a device, do the following:
1. Select the device in the list and press the Edit button. The Talker Setup dialog will open.
2. In the Talker Setup dialog change the device parameters.
3. Press the Apply button to add changes to the devices list. Press the Cancel button to cancel the
operation. The Talker Setup dialog will close.
4. Press the Save Settings button in the Config Æ Input/Output panel for the changes to take effect.
2
You can restore previous settings unless you have pressed the Save Settings button in the Config Æ Input/Output
tab. Once the Save Settings button has been pressed, previous settings cannot be restored. To restore settings, press
the Restore Settings button.

5. Enter the password to the Password required dialog and press OK. The changes will take effect.
To delete a device, do the following:

1. Select the device in the list and press the Delete button. The device will be deleted from the list.
2. Press the Save Settings button for the changes to take effect.
3. Enter the password to the Password required dialog and press OK. The changes will take effect.
3.1.2 Monitoring serial line
You can monitor the serial line to determine if a specified communication channel and the channel baud rate
are configured correctly and the system receives messages over the specified channel.
To monitor serial line, do the following:
1. Press the Line Monitor button in the Config Æ Input/Output tab. The Line Monitor window will open.
Figure 9 Line Monitor window

2. In the Line Monitor window, select the communication line from the drop-down list next to the Close
button. In case the communication line is a COM port, select the line baud rate from the drop-down list
next to the lines list. In case the communication line is a TCP/IP or a virtual line, enter the local port
number to the Local Port field.
NOTE: if an io.lines.xml configuration file is used, the drop-down list next to the Close button
contains a list of communication lines described in the configuration file. Select the line to monitor in the
list.
3. Check the Activate Log checkbox if you want all received messages to be written to a log file
[C:\ECDISDATA\Debug\LineMonitor.txt].
4. Press the Start button (the button label will change to Stop). If messages are being received they are
displayed in the window (what you see is AIS messages in the official format).
5. To clear the window, press the Clear Monitor button.
6. To stop monitoring press the Stop button.
7. To close the Line Monitor window, press the Close button.
3.2 Own Ship Data
IMPORTANT!
The own ship data configuration is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password.
However, the own ship current draft can be changed without the password provided no other own ship
parameter has been changed.

Configuring operating parameters of the own ship is very important for the correct functioning of the system.
The own ship parameters are configured in the Config Æ Own Ship tab. Here you can introduce parameters
of the own ship and set precise location of various devices onboard.
Figure 10 Config Æ Own ship tab, Own ship setup tab

To set the own ship parameters, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ Own Ship Æ Own ship setup tab.
2. In the tab, enter values of the parameters to the fields corresponding to the parameters:
• LOA-max Length – Maximum length of the vessel.
• B-max beam – Maximum beam of the vessel.
• Hm-max height – Maximum height of the vessel including the mast.
• Hb-bridge height – Height of the bridge.
• Speed – Speed in knots.
• Tmax-max draft – Maximum draft of the vessel.
• T-current draft – Current draft of the vessel.
• Turn radius starboard – Starboard turn radius.
• Turn radius port – Port turn radius.
• Minimal ship width on screen – If the width of the scaled own ship symbol in the scale of the
currently displayed chart is less than the parameter value, the scaled symbol changes to the point
symbol.
3. After the parameters have been entered, press the Save Settings button, enter the password and press
OK.
4. To restore previously saved settings, press the Restore Settings button. It is impossible to restore the
previous settings after the new settings have been saved 3 .
To set precise locations of positioning and other devices onboard the own ship, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ Own Ship Æ Position of instruments tab. Here you can set the precise location
for all positioning devices registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab as well as radar and other
devices onboard the own ship.
3
Measurement units for the own ship parameters are set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab.

Figure 11 Config Æ Own ship tab, Position devices tab

2. Set the conning station offset from the center of the vessel:
• Conning station X offset – Distance from the conning station to the centre of the vessel along the
x- axis.
• Conning station Y offset – Distance from the conning station to the centre of the vessel along the
y-axis.
3. Select a device in the Select instrument list and set parameters for the device. The parameters are:
• X offset – Distance from the vessel conning station to the device along the x-axis.
• Y offset – Distance from the vessel conning station to the device along the y-axis.
4. After the parameters have been entered, press the Save Settings button, enter the password and press
OK.
5. To restore previously saved settings, press the Restore Settings button. It is impossible to restore the
previous settings after the new settings have been saved.
6. The Advanced button opens for editing the MODevices.config.xml file where you can enter values
of RMS and fixed corrections for observation devices for the LOP position fix function (see chapter 7.2.3,
Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs) 4
3.3 System Setup
3.3.1 Measurement Units and Time
To set the measurement units for various values such as distance, speed, depth, elevation, and various
dimensions, use the options provided in the Config Æ Units and Time tab. In the tab you can also set the
time parameters: select the time zone you are sailing in, set the daylight saving time if necessary, as well as
select the format of the date display.
Figure 12 Config Æ Units and Time tab

To set measurement units, do the following:
1. To set the measurement unit for depths, elevations, and dimensions, select the unit in the
Depth/Elevation/Size Units list. The setting is applied immediately. The selected unit is indicated by the
Depth/Elevation Unit Indicator in the lower left corner of the chart view.
4
Measurement units for the device offsets are set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab.

2. To set the measurement unit for distances, select the unit in the Distance Units list. The setting is
applied immediately.
3. To set the measurement unit for speed, select the unit in the Speed Units list. The setting is applied
immediately.
To set time parameters, do the following:
1. To set the time zone, select the time zone from the time zones drop-down list. For the setting to take
effect, press the Apply button.
2. To set the daylight saving, enter the value in minutes to the Daylight Bias field. For the setting to take
effect, press the Apply button.
3. To set the time format, select the format in the Date Format list. The setting is applied immediately 5 .
3.3.2 User Interface Language Setup
ECDIS supports three languages for the user interface: English, Russian and Italian.
To set the interface language, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ System panel, Figure 13.
Figure 13 The Config-System tab

2. Select an interface language in the Language drop-down list.
3. For the changes to take effect, restart ECDIS.
3.3.3 Volume Setup
To set up the volume, go to the Config Æ System panel and press the Volume button. A standard Volume
Control window will open where the system sound can be configured.
3.3.4 System Check-up
While working with the ECDIS, you need to be aware of the system current state. The access to the system
check-up information is provided in the Info Æ System Info tab.
The system check-up includes checking databases status (Databases status tab), licenses status
(Licenses status tab), disks status (Disks status tab), and talkers status (Talkers status tab).
To perform the system check-up at the ECDIS startup, check the Perform check on startup checkbox. To
refresh the system check-up information, press the Refresh info button (while the refreshing procedure is
running the button label is Abort).
During the system check-up the message indicating the process running appears in the Alarms indicator
. Once acknowledged, the message is removed from the current alarms list.
In case the Perform check on startup checkbox is not set, the check-up is carried out automatically every
seven days.
5
The current onboard time is indicated in the Time and Date line of the Navigational panel. The time value is
calculated using the UTC time value received from the positioning device plus the time zone offset. To see the UTC time,
left-click on the Time and Date line and hold the button: the time changes to the UTC time. When you release the
button, the time changes back to the onboard time.

Figure 14 Info Æ System Info tab

3.3.5 System Information
The Info Æ System Info tab gives the user easy access to the System ID and the version of the CM-93/3
SDK installed. The system ID is a unique ID required for all systems that use CM-93/3 chart databases and
should be the same as the one written on the C-MAP eToken dongle.
To save the system information to a file, do the following:
1. Press the Copy User.usr file button. The Copy User.usr file dialog will open.
2. In the Copy User.usr file dialog, select a folder where to save the file and press the Export button. The
file will be saved to the specified location.
3.3.6 Color Differentiation Test
The color generating capability of any type of display screen will deteriorate with age and the Color
Differentiation Test diagram is provided to enable the mariner to verify that his display screen still retains the
color differentiation capability needed to distinguish between the various color-coded areas, lines and point
symbols of the ECDIS display.
The Color Test should be applied on the day and dusk color palettes (see chapter 7.5.3, Chart Display
Palettes).
Before the Color Test diagram is used, the black-adjust symbol SY(BLKADJ) should be brought up on the
screen and the contrast and brightness controls (or equivalent controls for an LCD) should be adjusted in a
specific way.
To bring up the black-adjust symbol, do the following:
1. Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered (see chapter 4.1, Installing and Displaying
Database) and added to the view (see chapter 4.1.2Displaying Database).
2. Open the Data Æ Chart Catalogue tab. In the databases drop-down list, select the ChartletsBase
database. Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop-down list.
3. Double-click on the AA5C1AB2 dataset (the dataset contains the black-adjust symbol). The chart view
will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset. The black-adjust symbol will be displayed
in the chart view.
4. If you can’t see the black-adjust symbol, make sure the following arrangements are made:
a. the display type is set to All other – the display type indicator is All other ;
b. the chart presentation type is set to S52 – the S52 option is selected in the Chart Æ Chart
Presentation tab, Presentation section;
c. the chart view scale is larger than 1:16 500.
To adjust the contrast and brightness control, do the following:
1. First, set contrast to a maximum, brightness to a minimum. Look at the black-adjust symbol.
2. Then if the centre square is not visible, turn up the brightness until it just appears.
3. Or, if the centre square is clearly visible (with contrast at maximum, brightness at minimum), turn the
contrast down until the inner square disappears, then turn contrast back up until the inner square is just
visible again.
4. If the above adjustment is not successful, select a more appropriate chart display palette and repeat this
procedure.
5. The "black level" is then correctly set. If a brighter display is required use the contrast control, but
preferably do not adjust the controls unless lighting conditions on the bridge change.
After the “black level” has been set, you can proceed with the color test. For the test you need to display the
color differentiation diagram in the chart view.
To open the color diagram, do the following:
1. Make sure that the ChartletsBase database is registered (see chapter 4.1, Installing and Displaying
Database) and added to the view (see chapter 4.1.2Displaying Database).
2. Open the Data Æ Chart Catalogue tab. In the databases drop-down list, select the ChartletsBase
database. Datasets included in the database will be listed in the pane below the drop-down list.
3. Double-click on the AA5C1WOO dataset (the dataset contains the color differentiation test diagram). The
chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to fully display the dataset. The color diagram will be
brought up to the chart view.
4. If you can’t see the color test diagram, make sure the following arrangements are made:
a. the display type is set to All other – the display type indicator is All other ;
b. the chart presentation type is set to S52 – the S52 option is selected in the Chart Æ Chart
Presentation tab, Presentation section;
c. the chart view scale is larger than 1:16 500.
5. The diagram consists of twenty squares extending over the whole of a 350x270 mm (approx) screen.
Each square is colored with one of the four main background area shades (such as shallow water blue,
DEPVS), and each carries a two-pixel wide diagonal line in one of the important line or symbol
foreground colors (such as planned route red, PLRTE).
6. The color differentiation test consists of being able to distinguish the background colors and to pick out
the like foreground colors, i.e. to say that squares 3, 5, 11, 15, 18 and 20 all have a shallow water blue
background, and that squares 3, 10 and 17 have a grey line.
3.4 Updating ECDIS Software
To update the ECDIS software you will need a CD or DVD disk with the new version.
To install the new version, do the following:
1. Insert the disk to the disk reader.
2. Installation package will launch automatically.
3. Follow the installation package instructions.
4. Updated software components will be installed in the same location, where the previously installed
components are.
3.5 Data Synchronization
The ECDIS implements a data synchronization technology designed to synchronize a single set of data
between all ECDIS computers connected in the cluster by automatically copying all changes introduced to
the data back and forth.
Data that are synchronized are: routes, databases, updates, manual updates, mariner objects, and own ship
configuration.
3.5.1 Synchronization Setup
Synchronization is carried out over the local network 6 . Computers of the network are assigned names and
roles. Names uniquely define each computer in the data synchronization scheme. Roles are not unique,
there can be several computers with the same role, and define the way computers participate in
synchronization. The network configuration for data synchronization is defined using an *.xml configuration
file Network.Config.xml. The file is located in the [C:\ECDISDATA\Config\] folder.
6
Synchronization setup is done using an *.xml configuration file and is available only to system administrators.

3.5.2 Synchronization Monitor
Data synchronization is an automatic process over which the user has no control. Information about the
current synchronization status is displayed in the Info Æ Synchronization Monitor tab.
Figure 15 Info Æ Synchronization Monitor tab

In the Info Æ Synchronization Monitor tab, the following information is displayed:
• Computer name – name of the computer (unique identifier of the computer in the local network);
• Computer role – role of the ECDIS computer;
• Synchronization status – status of synchronization tool on the computer:
− Active – ECDIS receives incoming synchronization data and sends outcoming
synchronization data;
− Stopped – ECDIS cannot receive incoming data nor can it send outcoming synchronization
data;
− Disabled – ECDIS receives incoming synchronization data, but cannot send outcoming
• Current state – current state of synchronization process on the computer:
− Disabled, able to synchronize with remote computers – the synchronization tool is
disabled, the local computer can only receive synchronization data from other local network
computers and carry out synchronization; but it cannot send synchronization data to other
computers;
− Stopped, no synchronization is available – the synchronization tool is stopped, no
synchronization data can be received or sent;
− Ready to start synchronization – the local computer is ready to receive synchronization
data and carry out synchronization;
− Waiting for remote synchronization to finish – synchronization is in progress between
remote computers of the local network and the local computer is waiting its turn for
synchronization;
− Synchronization in progress – synchronization is running on the computer;
• Synchronization log – in the Synchronization log tab, messages informing about the
synchronization process are displayed. To clear the log window, press the Clear log button.
• Tasks to perform – the list of synchronization tasks the local computer is to perform; if the task is
performed successfully, the task entry is removed from the Tasks to perform table and the
message informing about the task completion appears in the Synchronization log; if the task
failed, it is moved to the Failed tasks table and then, after 3 minutes, back to the Tasks to perform
table;
The Tasks to perform table has the following fields:
− Target – the role of the target computer; all computers with the indicated role will be sent

− Data type – type of data that should be synchronized; can be Databases, Updates, Manual
Updates, Mariners Objects, Routes, Own Ship Configuration, or Chart Data;
− Manual – indicates if the task was carried out automatically (Manual – No) or manually
(Manual – Yes);
− Clear metadata – indicates if synchronization metadata are to be deleted (Yes) or not (No);
metadata are deleted if the number of failed attempts to carry out a task has reached ten;
Figure 16 Info Æ Synchronization Monitor tab, Tasks to perform tab

• Failed tasks – the list of failed synchronization tasks; tasks are moved from the Failed tasks table
back to the Tasks to perform table after 3 minutes with the number of attempts increased by one;
after the number of attempts to perform the task reached 5, the task metadata are cleared and the
number of attempts is set to zero; the task completion tries are continued.
The Failed tasks table has the following fields:
− Target computer – the name of the target computer: only computer with the indicated name
is sent synchronization data;
− Data type – type of data that should be synchronized; can be Databases, Updates, Manual
Updates, Mariners Objects, Routes, Own Ship Configuration, or Chart Data;
− Manual – indicates if the task was carried out automatically (Manual – No) or manually
(Manual – Yes);
− Attempts done – number of attempts to perform the task; when the number reaches five, the
task metadata are cleared;
Figure 17 Info Æ Synchronization Monitor tab, Tasks to perform tab

In the Info Æ Synchronization Monitor tab, the Synchronization indicator is presented to help monitor
synchronization. The indicator shows the current state of the synchronization process.
Corresponds to the Disabled, able to synchronize with remote computers current

state – the synchronization tool is disabled, the local computer can only receive
synchronization data from other local network computers and carry out
synchronization; but it cannot send synchronization data to other computers.
Corresponds to the Ready to start synchronization current state – the local

computer is ready to receive synchronization data and carry out synchronization.
Corresponds to the Synchronization in progress current state – synchronization is

running on the computer.
Corresponds to the Waiting for remote synchronization to finish current state –

synchronization is in progress between remote computers of the local network and the
local computer is waiting its turn for synchronization.
3.5.3 Routes Synchronization

All data types are synchronized between the network computers automatically. However, synchronization of
routes may require additional actions on the part of the user.
Route planning is supposed to be done on the Route Planning Station computer. Synchronization of routes
between the Route Planning Station and the Master computer should be done manually.
To synchronize routes manually, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Route Planning tab.
2. In the Synchronize routes with drop-down list, select the computer to synchronize routes with, and
press the Synchronize routes with button. A synchronization task will be created and added to the list
of tasks to perform.
3. The task is performed using the same procedure as for automatic synchronization tasks 7 .
3.6 System Diagnostics Tools
The new function has been implemented for complex diagnostics of the system and saving the results in the
form of a report 8 .
Start-up test might not be enough for exhaustive diagnostics of the system. In this case use the complex
diagnostics utility by pressing the Collect diagnostic info on the Info-System info tab, Figure 14. The
results will re saved to a file named report.nfo, which you can view and/ or save to an external media. To do
the latter, press the save diagnostic info and specify the file directory in the standard Browse for folders
window that will then open.
7
Routes are synchronized automatically between Master and Backup computers. You don’t have to synchronize the data
manually between these computers.
If changes in routes data were made on Master or Backup computers they have to be manually synchronized with Route
Planning Station.
8
New feature in 5.0.84 program version.

Figure 18 System diagnostic report

4. INSTALLING DATA
4.1 Installing and Displaying Databases
4.1.1 Installing Databases
Installing chart databases on your system includes copying the databases to the system hard disk and
registering them in the ECDIS application. Installing can be done in the Data Æ Databases tab.
To install a database, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Databases tab.
Figure 19 Data Æ Databases tab

2. Connect the data storage device with the database to the system and press the Find databases button.
Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system. All detected databases
are listed in the Available databases pane (name and issue number).
3. Select the database name in the Available databases pane: the Register
database and Check signature buttons become active. The Check signature
button only becomes active if the signature check is available for the selected
database. Figure 20 Signature
4. To check the database signature, press the Check signature button. The check in progress
signature check progress is displayed in the Signature check progress dialog. dialog
To cancel the procedure, press the Abort button.
Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results
appears 9 .
5. To install the database, select the database in the Available databases pane and press the Register
database button: the database is copied to a pre-defined location on the system hard disk and registered
automatically. The database is added to the Registered DB list.
6. The following operations can be carried out with registered databases: integrity check, signature check,
and unregistering:
• To check the integrity of a registered database (if available), select the database in the Registered
DB list and press the Check integrity button (the button becomes active if integrity check is
available for the database).
Upon the termination of the integrity check a message with the information on the check results
appears 10 .
• To check the signature of a database, select the database in the Registered DB list and press the
Check signature button (the button becomes active if the signature check is available for the
selected database).
9
The signature check may help identify problems with the data authenticity and integrity. In case any problems have
been identified in the course of the signature check, contact the database provider to settle them.
10
The integrity check may help identify problems with the updates data integrity. In case any problems have been
identified in the course of the integrity check procedure, contact the updates provider to settle them.

Upon the termination of the signature check a message with the information on the check results
appears.
• To unregister a database, select the database in the Registered DB list and press the Unregister
database button. The database will be unregistered.
IMPORTANT!
If you unregister a database, it is deleted from the system hard disk. To restore data, you will need to obtain
the database saved on a removable data storage device and install the database once more.
After the database has been installed, it has to be added to view (see chapter 4.1.2, Displaying Database)
and licensed (see chapter 4.2, Licensing Data) if licensing is necessary.
4.1.2 Displaying Databases
To display data from a database on the system screen, the database should be added to the view. If you
have installed several databases you can hide databases you don’t need at the moment and display those
that you need.
To add a database to the view, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Add/Remove Database tab. All registered but not added to the view databases are
listed in the Registered Databases pane; all registered and added to the view databases are listed in
the Databases in View pane 11 .
Figure 21 Data Æ Add/Remove Database tab

2. To add a database to the view, select the database in the Registered Databases list and press the Add
Database button. The database name will be moved to the Databases in View list and the data from the
database will be displayed in the chart view.
3. To remove a database from the view, select the database in the Databases in View list and press the
Remove Database button. The database name will be moved back to the Registered Databases list
and the data removed from the chart view.
4. To refresh the Registered Databases and Databases in View lists (in case they were modified using
external tools), press the Refresh button.
11
Generally, databases are automatically added to the view in the process of registration.

4.2 Licensing Data

Cartographic data stored in chart databases produced by Jeppesen are protected from unauthorized use by
licenses. Licenses allow viewing all charts available for a specified area in the database: without licenses
you can only view small scale charts. Licenses are available for worldwide coverage or any combination of
Zones, Areas, or Cells. You have to purchase and install licenses for the coverage you have selected.
The entire world coverage is divided into 9 Zones. Each Zone is divided into several Areas. Some Zones are
also divided into Cells (4X4 degrees) and special areas. You may have a license for any combination of
Zones, Areas, and Cells.
Zones are specified by their numbers from Zone 0(World coverage) to Zone 10.
Areas are specified by Zones to which they belong and their numbers in the Zones, e.g. Zone 1, Area 3.
Cells are regarded as Areas and their numbering continues after the numbering of Areas in a Zone. For
example, the first Cell in the Zone 2 is listed as Zone 2, Area 7. As there are six Areas in that Zone, Areas
following the Zone 2, Area 6 are actually Cells.
To obtain a license for the coverage you need for a voyage, you should come to your charts supplier with
your eToken and after settling purchase formalities, you will be provided with the licenses file.
You can also order licenses by e-mail or by phone. To do so, you will have to provide your System ID
number to your chart suppliers.
IMPORTANT!
The System ID is necessary for issuing licenses. It is unique for your system and stored in the eToken. Each
license is issued for a specified System ID. You will be able to use a license only if it is issued for your
System ID and only if the correct eToken is connected to the system.
The System ID information is available in the Data Æ Licensing tab and in the Info Æ System Info tab.
For details about ordering and purchasing licenses, contact your charts supplier.
After the licenses have been obtained (as a licenses file or as 16-digit license codes), they must be installed
on the system to enable the ECDIS application to decrypt and use the data (for the chart database, only the
coverage for which you have purchased licenses can be displayed).
4.2.1 Installing Licenses Manually
You can install licenses manually if you have 16-digit license codes.
To install a license manually, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Licensing tab.
2. In the Databases drop-down list select the database for which you are applying the license.
3. Press the Add manually button to open the pane for manual licenses installation.
Figure 22 Data Æ Licensing tab, Add Licenses manually

4. In the areas list select the Zone or the Areas for which the license is generated. Your selection will be
displayed in the Data Set or Area Name field above the list.
5. Enter manually or copy and paste the 16-digit code to the License String field.

6. Please ensure that you have an eToken connected to the system. The eToken must be the one used
during installation.
7. Press the Add License button. The process will take a few seconds. Upon completion, a message
License has been added successfully will appear. Press OK 12 .
4.2.2 Installing Licenses from File
If you have a license file, you can install all licenses stored in the file using the Add Licenses from File
function.
To install licenses from file, do the following:
1. Connect the removable data storage device with license file to the system. License files should be stored
in a folder named Licenses for the ECDIS to be able to detect them.
3. In the Databases drop-down list, select the database for which you are applying the license.
4. Press the Add Licenses from file button to open the pane for adding licenses from file.
5. Press the Find licenses button to start searching for license files on all removable devices connected to
the system. All detected licenses are listed in the upper window of the pane (the name and issue number
of the database for which the license is issued and the license expiration date). Select a license to view
the path to the license file, the license coverage and the license code in the lower window of the pane.
Figure 23 Data Æ Licensing tab, Add Licenses from file

6. To install licenses, select the license file with licenses to be installed and press the Apply license button.
Licenses will be installed and registered automatically. The licenses installation process will take a few
seconds. Upon completion, a message Licensing completed will appear.
7. After the license has been installed, the licensed data is displayed on the screen immediately.
4.2.3 Viewing Installed Licenses
You can view the list of all licenses applied to a specified database. To do so:
To view the list of installed licenses, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Licensing panel.
2. In the Databases drop-down list select a database.
Press the Licenses list button. The licenses list will be displayed in the licenses list pane. The information
displayed for each license includes expiry date, coverage, and license code.
You can get a list of licenses that expire before a specified date.
To view the list of licenses expiring before a specified date, do the following:
2. In the Databases drop-down list select a database.
12
Note that when you enter information in the Data Set or Area Name field you will only find Zones and Areas. Cells
are also listed as areas in this list. All Cells, Areas and Additional Areas within a Zone have a unique number. For
example the cell 94B in Zone 1 will be listed as Zone 1, Area 91.

3. Press the Display expired licenses before date button to open the pane where you can view the
licenses expiring before a specified date.
4. In the date field enter the licenses expiry limit date and press the Display expired licenses before date
button. In the list below all licenses that expire before the specified date will be displayed.
Figure 24 Data Æ Licensing tab, Display expired licenses before date

4.2.4 Dynamic Licensing
Jeppesen Marine provides its clients with a new service: dynamic licensing. Dynamic licensing gives clients
the possibility to pay for licenses for single charts that were actually viewed rather than for licenses for a
whole database or a chart collection.
¾ To activate the dynamic licensing service, do the following:

1. Contact Jeppesen Marine and subscribe to the dynamic licensing service. You will be registered on the
server. In the subscription, databases and chart collections available to you will be specified.
2. To activate the service, send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or, in case of
a local network, from the server computer (see chapters 6.1.1, Automatic Updating and 6.1.2, Semi-
automatic Updating).
3. In response, the updates server sends updates for already licensed datasets, if there are any, and the
dynamic licensing initialization answer. The initialization answer contains:
• The System ID of the system the answer is intended for;
• Indication of an action to be performed (Activate or Stop the service, or Change the service terms);
• Credit value, which is a part of the overall bridge credit;
• Mandatory report date for not reported charts; if a chart is not reported before the date, the access
to all data (both reported and not reported datasets) is denied and can only be resumed after the
chart use is reported and confirmed;
4. The dynamic licensing information (credit value, collection keys, and next mandatory report date) is
written to the eToken.
5. In case of an ECDIS cluster, the dynamic licensing information is distributed over the network to all
nodes.
6. After the subscription has been activated, the following information is displayed in the Data Æ Dynamic
Licensing tab:
• credit rest in the Credit Rest field, the credit rest value is sent to you each time you receive
updates;
• next mandatory report date in the Next Report Date field;

• last confirmation date in the Last Confirmation Date field;
• the list of databases available for dynamic licensing in the Available Databases list;
• the list of collections available for dynamic licensing in a specified database in the Available
Collections list (the collections are listed in your subscription);
Figure 25 Data Æ Dynamic Licensing tab, data displayed after the service activation
¾ To view charts using dynamic licensing, do the following:

1. Make sure that the Enabled Dynamic Licensing checkbox in the Data Æ Dynamic Licensing tab is
checked.
2. Scroll the chart view to the chart you want to open and zoom in. The chart will be opened and added to
the non-reported charts list. The price of the chart will be deducted from the credit rest value. To view the
non-reported charts list, press the Non Reported button; and to view the reported charts list, press the
Reported button. In lists, names and data access expiry dates are displayed 13 .
3. To refresh the data displayed in the Data Æ Dynamic Licensing tab, press the Refresh button.
4. The use of charts should be reported to the server within a specified time: the mandatory date of the next
report. If you fail to report the charts, you will be denied access to both reported and non-reported charts.
To resume the access to data all charts should be reported and confirmed.
5. To report the use of charts, request updates using automatic or semi-automatic updating functionality
(see chapters 6.1.1, Automatic Updating and 6.1.2, Semi-automatic Updating). Reports on the use of
dynamically licensed data are sent automatically together with the update request; and the confirmation
answers containing new credit rest value, new date of mandatory report and expiry date for all reported
charts are sent back with updates.
¾ To change terms of the dynamic licensing service or to terminate the service, do the following:
1. Contact Jeppesen Marine and agree on the terms changes or the service termination. The changes will
be registered on the server.
2. To activate the changes, send an updates request to the updates server from your computer or, in case
of a local network, from the server computer (see chapters 6.1.1, Automatic Updating and 6.1.2, Semi-
automatic Updating). In response, the server sends updates for already licensed datasets, if there are
any, and the dynamic licensing initialization answer where the action to be performed (terms changes or
service termination) will be indicated.
4.3 Installing New Version of the Database
Cartographic data are likely to change often. These changes are applied to databases in the form of
updates. Later the updates are included in the database as regular data and a new version of the database
is issued. These issues are made regularly and if you are a Jeppesen Marine customer, you are provided
with the new versions of the CM-93/3 chart database as soon as it is issued.
To install a new version of the database, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Databases tab.
13
You can only view charts of the collections you are subscribed to.
2. Connect the data storage device with the new version of the database to the system and press the Find
databases button. Databases are searched for on all removable devices connected to the system. All
detected databases are listed in the Available databases pane (name and issue number). Currently
registered databases are displayed in the Registered DB list.
Figure 26 Data Æ Databases tab, current version database in the Registered DB list, new version database
in the Available databases list
3. Select the new version database in the Available databases list and press the Register database
button. In this example it will show the message ‘The database ‘Professional+’, issue: 380 already
registered. Do you want to update it with database ‘Professional+’, issue: 381?’ Press the YES button.
4. The old version of the database will be overwritten with the new version. The new version is registered
and added to the view automatically 14 .
4.4 Licensing Software Modules
The ECDIS application includes functional modules that require individual licensing. These modules are
Import S-57, Anticollision, Ship Model, and ECDIS Input/Output.
• Import S-57 – module performing import of cartographic data from the S-57 format to the CM93v3
format.
• Anticollision – module performing estimation of collision danger of the own ship and an AIS or
ARPA target.
• ECDIS Input/Output – module controlling connection of input/out devices to the system and
processing data coming from the devices.
Licensing of software modules is performed in the same way as licensing of cartographic data. To carry out
operations with licenses of software modules, in the Data Æ Licensing tab, select Software Modules from
the Databases drop-down list. After that all other operations with installing of licenses are identical to the
operations for installing data licenses.
4.5 ENC Data in S-57 Format
4.5.1 S-63 Protection of ENC Data
The ECDIS fully implements the IHO data protection scheme (S-63). All elements of the scheme required on
the Data Client side are available in the Data Æ Import S57 tab.
To use ENC data protected with the S-63 scheme, you will need to be able to perform the following actions:
• Send your user permit written in your dongle together with data request to a Data Server to order
data;
• Apply S-63 cell permits to be able to decrypt the data;
• Apply Scheme Administrator (SA) certificate to be able to verify data authenticity.
14
It is important to note that all existing licenses will be valid after the new version of the database is installed and you
will not need to request new licenses.

To copy user permit to a file, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Import S57 tab and press the Copy user permit button. The Copy S63 User Permit
dialog will open.
Figure 27 Data Æ Import S57 tab

2. In the Copy S63 User Permit dialog, select a folder where to save the user permit file and press the
Copy button. The user permit will be saved to a UserPermit.txt file.
Figure 28 Copy S63 User Permit dialog

3. After the user permit is saved to a file, you can send it to a Data Server together with the data request.
The Data Server generates individual data licenses using your user permit data.
To apply S-63 cell permits, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button. The Apply S63 Cell
Permits dialog will open.
2. In the folder tree, select the folder where the cell permits file is stored. The file name will be displayed in
the pane to the right.
Figure 29 Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog

3. Select the permits file and press the Apply cell permit button. The cell permits written in the permits file
will be applied. You can now decrypt the S-57 data and convert them to the CM93v3 format.

4. In case an error occurred during permits application, the error message will be displayed in the Message
log pane.
To view all installed S-63 cell permits or uninstall a specified cell permit, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Import S57 tab and press the Apply S63 cell permits button. The Apply S63 Cell
Permits dialog will open.
2. In the Apply S63 Cell Permits dialog, press the Installed cell permit button. The Installed cell permits
dialog will open. In the dialog window all installed cell permits together with Data Servers who provided
the data and the permits expiration dates are listed.
Figure 30 Installed cell permits dialog

3. To uninstall a permit, select it in the list, press the Delete permit button, and confirm the operation. The
permit will be uninstalled.
4. In case an error occurred during uninstalling permits, the error message will be displayed in the
Message log pane.
To apply a new SA certificate, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Import S57 tab and press the Apply SA Certificate button. The Apply SA Certificate
dialog will open.
2. In the folder tree, select the folder where the certificate is stored. The certificate file stored in the selected
folder will be displayed in the pane to the right.
Figure 31 Apply SA Certificate dialog

3. Select the certificate file and press the Apply certificate button. The certificate will be applied and the
message ‘A new SA certificate (public key) has been installed. The certificate is valid to dd.mm.yyyy or
unless the SA issues a new one for security reasons.’ will appear. In case there was an SA certificate
previously installed, the new certificate will override the previous one.
4. You can restore the previous SA certificate. To do so, press the Restore certificate button and confirm
the operation. The previous certificate will be restored.

5. To view information about the currently installed SA certificate, press the Installed certificate info
button. The Information about installed certificate window will open. The following information on the
current SA certificate is available: the certificate issuing organization (the Issued by field); the certificate
requesting organization (the Issued for field); the certificate validity period (the Valid from and the Valid
till fields). To close the window, press the Close button. :
Figure 32 Information about installed certificate window

6. In case an error occurred during operations with SA certificate, the error message will be displayed in the
Message log pane 15 .
4.5.2 Large Media Support
In case S-57 data are provided using large media, you can use the large media support functionality of the
ECDIS to work with the data.
To convert S-57 data to CM93v3 format using large media support, do the following:
1. Insert the large media device to the computer.
2. Open the Data Æ Import S57 tab. Enter a name of the database to be created by S-57 data conversion
to the Database Name field and press the Install Media button. The Install Media window will open.
3. Press the Find Media button to load media information to the system. Available media will be listed in
the Available Media pane. The following information about media is provided: media name, media
contents and media location. Select a media in the list to see additional information and installation
instructions in the Instructions pane 16 .
Figure 33 Install Media window

4. To convert a media to the CM93v3 format, select it in the media list and press the Install Media button.
A CM93v3 database with the specified name (see step 2) will be compiled or updated. For details on the
conversion process, see chapter 4.5.3, Import S-57 to CM93v3.
5. To close the Install Media window, press the Close button.
15
The check of the validity of the SA signature against each ENC signature is done automatically when the ENC data are
being converted to the CM93v3 format.
16
To be able to convert a media to the CM93v3 format permits for the media must be installed in the system.
4.5.3 Import S-57 to CM93v3
The ECDIS provides the possibility to import data from the S-57 format to the CM93v3 format. This function
can be accessed from the Data Æ Import S57 tab.
In case the S-57 data are protected using IHO data protection scheme (S-63), cells permits should be
installed before starting conversion of the data to the CM93v3 format.
IMPORTANT!
The S-57 Import functional module needs separate licensing. For details on installing licenses see chapter
4.4, Licensing Software Modules.
S-57 data are available to the users as exchange sets containing datasets, updates, pictures, textual
descriptions, and a catalog file with the description of the exchange set.
To import S-57 data to the CM93v3 data, do the following:
1. Connect the data storage device with the S-57 data to your system and open the Data Æ Import S57
tab.
2. Press the Find databases button. The ECDIS will search for S-57 data on all removable data storage
devices connected to the system. All detected S-57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S-57 source
data pane.
Figure 34 Data Æ Import S57 tab, detected S-57 exchange sets displayed in the S57 source data pane
3. In the Database Name field enter the name of the database that will be created during the conversion
process.
4. Select an S-57 exchange set to be converted in the S-57 source data pane and press the Convert
button. The data conversion process will start. The process is performed in two stages:
a. At the first stage, verification of S-57 data is performed. Errors found during the verification process
are recorded to a LOG file. If any critical errors are found, the conversion process is cancelled. You
can turn off the display of error messages. To do so, check the Turn off the errors report
checkbox. To turn the error messages display on, clear the Turn off the errors report checkbox. If
the error messages display is on, the errors found by verification of a next dataset are displayed in
the Errors Report window.
You can do the following:
− To continue conversion of the dataset, press the Continue button;
− To cancel conversion of the dataset and go on with converting the next dataset and creating
the CM93v3 database, press the Skip button;
− To cancel conversion of all datasets altogether and stop creating the CM93v3 database,
press the Stop button.

b. At the second stage S-57 data are converted to datasets of the CM93v3 database. If there is no
database with the name entered to the Database Name field a new CM93v3 database is created
during the conversion process; if there is a database with such name (you can select it from the
Database Names drop-down list) data of this database are overwritten by the new data. At the
termination of the conversion process the message 'Database was created successfully' is
displayed.
5. To view the log of all errors occurred during the data conversion; press the Show log button in the Data
Æ Import S57 tab. The S57 conversion error log window will open where you can view all the errors.
6. The new CM93v3 database is saved to a predefined location and is registered in the ECDIS
automatically.
4.5.4 Updating Imported S-57 Data
To update a database created by conversion of S-57 data to CM93v3 data, do the following:
1. Connect the data storage device with the S-57 updates data to your system.
2. Open the Data Æ Import S57 tab.
3. Press the Find databases button. The ECDIS will search for S-57 data on all removable data storage
devices connected to the system. All detected S-57 data exchange sets will be listed in the S-57 source
data pane.
4. In the Database Name drop-down list, select the name of the database that will be updated.
5. Select the S-57 exchange set with updates to the database in the S57 source data pane.
6. Press the Convert button. Converted data will be added to the data contained in the specified
database 17 .
17
Databases created by conversion are encrypted for the eToken dongle inserted to your computer at the moment of
conversion. These databases can only be used with this same dongle or a dongle of a dongles group to which it belongs.
5. CHARTS DISPLAY
Chart databases consist of a number of charts. These charts are electronic copies of regular paper charts.
However, working with the electronic charts, you don’t have to prepare a next chart and plot the own ship
position on it while working with another chart at the same time, as it happens when working with paper
charts.
Electronic charts are combined into Zones, Areas, and Cells. You can purchase licenses for any set of the
Zones, Areas, and Cells you need.
Depending on the set of Zones, Areas, and Cells, you have a continuous coverage for a geographic area.
The coverage is made up of the electronic charts joining to each other. For example, you have purchased a
license for the English Channel (Zone 1, Area 10). It means you have a continuous coverage for all waters in
and around the English Channel. It looks as if you have a single chart for the whole English Channel and
some part of this chart is displayed on the screen.
Figure 35 Chart coverage for the area of the English Channel (Zone 1, Area 10)
Each Zone, Area, and Cell is made up of a set of electronic charts (copies of paper charts) with different
scales. If you wish, you may switch on the display of borders of the source paper charts. But usually it is not
necessary.
5.1 Moving around the Chart View
The coverage of a geographic area with electronic charts consists of a set of charts that make up one single
chart and some part of this single chart is displayed on the screen like in Figure 36. When moving around the
chart, you are, as it were, moving the chart under the screen.

Figure 36 Electronic chart with a part of it on the screen

To move around the chart, you can use three ways:
• Left-click in a position on the chart and the chart will be scrolled so that the position becomes the
center of the screen.
• Move the mouse pointer to the upper, lower, left, or right border of the screen: the pointer will
change to a thick black arrow . Left-click to move the screen in the direction of the arrow along
the chart.
• The Go to Position function: Open the Chart Æ Chart Settings tab; in the New Center section,
enter coordinates of the point you want to be moved to the center of the screen: the latitude to the
upper field and the longitude to the lower field. Press the Go to Position button: the chart will be
scrolled so that the indicated position becomes the center of the screen.
5.2 Scaling the Chart View
All source paper charts used for creating electronic charts have different compilation scales. The original
scale of an electronic chart is the compilation scale of the paper chart digitized to create the electronic chart.
The scale at which the electronic chart is displayed on the screen usually differs from the original scale and
is called the current view scale. Use the Original Scale option of the Chart Viewing Tools panel to
synchronize the original and the current view scales of the chart if necessary.
The same geographical area can be covered by several charts with different scales. Which chart is displayed
at the moment depends on the current view scale. All charts included in the database are divided into groups
according to their scale called scale levels. The currently displayed chart belongs to the scale level
corresponding to the current view scale. The levels are as follows:
Scale name Letter symbol Current view scale range
Background, small scale Z (0) 1:5,000,001 – UNLIMITED
Background, medium scale A (1) 1:1,500,001 – 1:5,000,000
Overview B (2) 1:500,001 – 1:1,500,000
General C (3) 1:150,001 – 1:500,000
Coastal D (4) 1:50,001 – 1:150,000
Approach E (5) 1:15,001 – 1:50,000
Harbor F (6) 1:5,001 – 1:15,000
Berthing G (7) 0 – 1:5,000
For example, when the current view scale is 1:100 000, charts of the "Coastal" level are displayed. When the
current scale is 1:40 000, charts of the "Approach" level are displayed. The ECDIS application changes
charts in the view automatically when you set a new current view scale corresponding to a different scale
level. Besides that, an alarm may be given at the change of the scale level.
When changing the current view scale of the chart, it may differ from the original chart scale. If the current
view scale is larger than the original chart scale, the view is overscaled; if the current view scale is smaller
than the original chart scale, the view is underscaled. For example, the original chart scale is 1:50 000, and
the current view scale is 1:20 000. The current view scale is within scale range of the Approach (E) scale
level and the chart of this level is displayed. However, the scale of this chart is 1:50 000, which is 2.5 times
as small as the current view scale.
Such situations may be dangerous as you are expecting more detailed information at the set current view
scale, whereas the source paper chart wasn’t supposed to have the expected detail level. You may be
relying too much on the chart and get into an accident. The ECDIS has an indicator that informs you about
the underscale or overscale of the current view to avoid accidents.
There are several methods for changing the chart view scale.
To scale the chart view using the drag-to-zoom method:
1. Press and hold down the left mouse button, while drawing the drag-to-zoom rectangle around the
area you wish to zoom in.
2. Release the mouse button. The area inside the box will be shown in the whole chart window.
Figure 37 Zooming the chart view using the drag-to-zoom method

3. If you want to cancel this operation press the ESC key while drawing.
4. To zoom the chart out do the same holding the SHIFT key down 18 .
To scale the chart view using the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel:
• Type the scale in the Chart Scale Edit field and press ENTER.
• The Zoom In button doubles the current view scale and the Zoom Out button
halves it.
• The Original Scale option changes the scale to the original scale of the chart that is currently in the
view .
• The Best scale option displays a chart with the largest scale available for the position of the own
19
ship. The chart is displayed at its original scale .
To scale the chart view using the mouse wheel:
18
In the case of zooming out, the whole chart window will shrink to the size of the drag-to-zoom rectangle after
releasing the mouse button.
19
The Best Scale option is only available if the Navigation mode is on.

Turn the mouse wheel forward to increase the current view scale and backward to decrease the current view
scale. This way the current view scale is increased/decreased by 5% with every turn of the wheel 20 .
5.3 Bookmarks
The current chart view is defined by the position of the screen center, the current scale, and the current chart
display settings. Using the Bookmarks option, you can save the current screen coordinates and chart
settings to a bookmark. When this bookmark is opened later, the displayed chart will be identical.
To use bookmarks, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Settings tab.
2. Enter the name of the bookmark to the bookmark names field in the Bookmarks section.
3. Press the Add button. The bookmark will be saved and added to the bookmarks list.
4. To open a previously saved bookmark, select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop-down list and press
the Go To button. The chart will be scrolled to the center position saved in the bookmark and scaled
accordingly.
5. To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark in the Bookmarks drop-down list, press the Delete button,
and confirm the bookmark deletion.
5.4 Chart Objects Information and Chart Legend
A vector electronic chart is a part of geographic information system. An electronic chart displays data stored
in a geographic database. The database stores records of geographical objects. The objects are defined by
a set of attributes. These are the values of the attributes that define the way the objects are displayed on the
screen.
Besides the attributes defining the appearance and the position of an object on the electronic chart, the set
of attributes of the object may include additional information attributes such as for example the object name,
textual information, picture, and other attributes that are not required to be displayed in the chart.
To get access to this information, use the Object Info function. The function displays attributes of objects in
a separate panel, the Object Info panel. To open the panel, right-click in any position in the chart view. The
Object Info panel will open with a list of all objects that were under the mouse pointer when you right-clicked
in the chart.
There are different types of objects. They are point, line, and area object types. Hence a position in the chart
can be shared by numerous objects of different types. All objects that share the position where you right-
clicked will be listed in the Object Info panel. If you need information about a particular object, right-click on
the object. The object will be listed in the Object Info panel together with all other objects under the pointer.
Figure 38 Object Info panel

The Object Info panel consists of two panes: the pane displaying the list of objects and the pane displaying
the attributes of a specified object. To display attributes of an object, select it in the objects list.
20
In the case the mouse wheel has no effect, left-click in the chart to return the active focus to the chart view.
The first object in the objects list is the dataset (the electronic chart) that was under the mouse pointer when
the Object Info panel was opened.
Double click on the object in the list to highlight it on the chart. To clear highlighting, press the Clear
highlight button.
If an object symbol is against a yellow background it means that the object has been updated by
means of auto update (RTU).
If an object symbol is against a blue background it means that the object is a mariner object.
In the Object Info panel you can also open the Chart Legend pane. To do so, press the Chart Legend
button. To close the chart legend and return to the objects list, outpress the Chart Legend button. The Chart
Legend pane provides information about the dataset. Partially this information is the same that you get in the
Attributes pane when you select the dataset in the objects list. However, the chart legend provides
additional information: chart units in the Chart Units section and the current settings of the dataset display in
the Current Display section.
Figure 39 Object Info panel, Chart Legend

5.5 Additional Chart Windows
The ECDIS provides the possibility to use additional chart windows besides the main chart window. The
additional windows are the look-ahead window and the 3D window.
5.5.1 Look-ahead Window
The look-ahead window is a chart view window. You can use it at the same time as the main chart view
window and have two different views of the same area.
To open the look-ahead window, do the following:
2. In the New Window section, press the Chart button. The Look-ahead View will open.
The look-ahead window properties are the same as those of the main window. The properties are set in the
tabs of the Chart panel. The properties are set for the chart window which is currently selected. To select a
chart window, use the Look Ahead and Monitor buttons that appear in the upper right corner of the panel
after you have opened the look-ahead window.
The Chart Scale panel of the Look-ahead View differs from that of the main chart view.
• In the Scale field, the chart view scale and the over scale factor are displayed.
The over scale factor shows in how many times the chart view scale is larger or
smaller than the original chart scale.
• The Zoom In button doubles the Look-ahead View scale and the Zoom
Out button halves it.
Last update December 11, 2012 Figure 40 Chart

44
Scale panel
• In the Scale edit field, the scale of the Look-ahead View is set: enter the scale value and press the
ENTER key. The chart view scale will be changed.
• The Original Scale button sets the view scale to the value of the original scale of the chart that is
displayed currently.
• The Ship on screen option scrolls the chart so that the own ship was in the view.
• The Synchronize button synchronizes the look-ahead view and the main chart view so that the
same geographic area is displayed in both views 21 .
5.5.2 3D Window
The 3D window displays the chart area that is currently on the screen as a 3-dimensional model.
To open the 3D window, do the following:
2. In the New Window section, press the 3D button. The 3D window will open.
Figure 41 3D Window
The 3D Window can be expanded for a better 3D view and, if required, shown on a separate PC monitor.
To arrange the 3D view, use the 3D window control buttons:
Set view from ship – Sets the view from the own ship. This mode is available only if the ship is
inside the chart view (and the 3D window) borders.
Show/hide vertices – Displays/hides vertices, the points on which the 3D picture is built.
Show/hide wireframe – Displays/hides the lines connecting the 3D picture vertices (see above).
Show/hide colored Z layers – When this option is on, all depths are divided into 10 layers from the
minimum depths to the surface. The layers are displayed in different colors. The palette for the
layers presentation is selected in the Z colors panel (see below). When Z layers are hidden all
depths are displayed in blue color (but with different shades).
Show/hide alarm area – When this option is on, all depths shallower than the safety contour are
marked with red color.
Show/hide water surface – Displays/hides the water surface which is represented as a blue plane.
21
The Synchronize function doesn’t work together with the Ship on screen option on.

Show/hide terrain – Displays/hides the Terrain profile. When the terrain profile is hidden, the land
area is always displayed flat.
Show/hide seabed – Displays/hides the seabed.
Show/hide compass – Displays/hides the compass. The compass is represented as a blue and
red arrow in the lower left corner. The blue arrow points to the north and the red arrow points to the
south.
Show/hide navigation – Displays/hides aids to navigation.
Show/hide vessel – Displays/hides the own ship. The ship's size in the 3D window depends on the
chart scale.
Show/hide ERBL – Displays/hides the Electronic Range and Bearing Line in the 3D window.
Depth and coordinate scale frame – Displays/hides the frame with the values of the depth,
latitude and longitude coordinate scales.
Zoom in – Zooms the 3D view in.
Zoom out – Zooms the 3D view out.
Z scale panel. In the Z Scale panel, you can adjust vertical scale for the best presentation of the
surface. The land surface and seabed surface scales are configured separately.
Figure 42 3D Window, Z scale panel

The vertical scale with the value of 1 displayed in the field under the scale control (slider in the
highest position) means that the vertical scale of the 3D view is the same as the chart scale. The
vertical scale with the value of 100 is 100 times as large as the chart scale.

Z colors panel. In the Z colors panel, you can select one of the three palettes for depth layers
presentation. The "Show/hide colored Z layers" option (see above) must be switched on.
Figure 43 3D Window, Z colors panel
Besides the 3D window control buttons, you can arrange the 3D view by zooming it in, zooming it out and
rotating it. To zoom the view in or out, rotate the mouse wheel forward or backward respectively. To rotate
the view in the horizontal plane, hold the left mouse button and move the mouse; to rotate the view in the
vertical plane, hold the right mouse button and move the mouse.
If you change the view of the chart (zoom in, zoom out, or scroll the chart), the 3D view will be changed
automatically.
The 3D window can be closed and resized as a standard MS Windows window.
5.6 Setting up Chart Display
This chapter describes how to configure the chart display. The settings described here configure the chart
appearance and the content displayed in the chart view.
In addition to the chart display settings, there is a set of navigational chart settings. The navigational chart
settings configure the chart display so that it would be more convenient to monitor the own ship navigation.
The navigational settings include chart orientation, true and relative motions modes, best scale mode, and
the display of lights sectors. The settings are described in the chapter 7.5, Navigational Chart Settings.
5.6.1 Chart Presentation Models
There are three chart presentation models available for the presentation of the chart:
• C-Map – The presentation model is based on the INT1 standard.
• S-52 – The presentation model is based on the IHO S-52 standard.
• S-52 Simplified – The S-52 chart presentation model with simplified symbols for buoys and
beacons.
The C-Map presentation model is not based on official standards. If this model is used, in the chart view
there is the 'Non-standard chart presentation is used' notice displayed in the upper left corner.
Figure 44 C-Map presentation Figure 45 S-52 presentation model Figure 46 S-52 Simplified
model presentation model
The C-Map presentation model is used by default.

To set one of the presentation models, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab.
Figure 47 Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab, Presentation models

2. In the Presentation section, select one of the presentation models. The selected model will be applied to
the char view immediately.
5.6.2 Display Type
The Display Type option is used to choose the required level of detail to be applied to the chart. The ECDIS
implements four display categories:
• Base – The Display Base is that part of the Standard Display which should be permanently
retained on the display. It consists of coastline (high water); own ship's safety contour, to be
selected by the mariner; indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety
contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour; indication of isolated dangers
which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc.,
and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation; traffic
routing systems; scale, range, orientation and display-mode; units of depth and height. In addition to
the objects set, a specified set of chart presentation parameters is used.
• Custom Base – Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or
removed from the base set of parameters. The last chart presentation parameters settings are
saved in the system.
• Standard – The Standard Display is on screen when the chart is first displayed by the ECDIS. The
Standard Display is recalled by single operator action: press the Data Display Type indicator
in the Indicators panel. The Standard display consists of Display Base; drying line;
indication of fixed and floating aids to navigation; boundaries of fairways, channels, etc; visual and
radar conspicuous features; prohibited and restricted areas; chart scale boundaries; indication of
cautionary notes. In addition to the objects set, a specified set of chart presentation parameters is
used.
• Custom Standard – Additional chart presentation parameters selected by the user are added to or
removed from the standard set of parameters. The last chart presentation parameters settings are
saved in the system.
• All other – The All Other Display shows the chart information in full., the All Other Display type
has no mandatory chart presentation parameters. The All Other Display is recalled by single
operator action: press the Data Display Type indicator in the Indicators panel.
• Custom – The Custom Display displays the Display Base and other chart information by class on
demand.
To set one of the display types, do the following:
2. In the Display Type drop-down list, select a display type. Information corresponding to the selected
display type will appear on the screen immediately.

3. The Custom Base display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the Base
Display type. By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings.
4. The Custom Standard display type stores the set of chart presentation parameters last used for the
Standard Display or All Other types. By selecting this option you restore the parameters settings.
In the table below the use of chart presentation parameters for the display types is presented 22 :
Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display
Depth settings
Two shades + +
Safe contour only + +
Isolated dangers in unsafe + +
waters
Shallow pattern + +
Safe depths + +
Plain depth contour + +
Other settings
Plain borders + +
NOAA navaids + +
ENC boundary ++ ++
Chart boundary + +
Overscale id - ++
Scale boundary - +
Lat/Lon grid + +
22
++ – the parameter is mandatory for the display type; when the display type is turned on, the parameters
are set automatically; setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the Custom
Base or Custom Standard;
+ – the parameter is not mandatory for the display type; when the display type is turned on, the parameter
is not set automatically, but it remains set if it was set before; setting or removing one of the parameters
doesn’t change the current display type;
- – the parameter is not mandatory for the display type, when the display type is turned on the parameters
are removed automatically; setting or removing one of the parameters switches the display type to the
Custom Base or Custom Standard;
Presentation parameters not mentioned in the table belong to the parameters group marked with “-”.

Presentation parameter Base Display Standard Display
Text settings
National text + +
Aids to navigation tooltip + +
To set the Custom Display type, do the following:

2. In the Display Type drop-down list, select the Custom option. The list of object
classes that you can select to be displayed will open.
3. Select the object classes you want to be displayed. To select an object class,
check the checkbox to the left from the object class name. All objects of the
selected object classes will appear on the screen immediately.
4. To save the current configuration of the Custom Display, enter the name of the
configuration to the drop-down list at the bottom of the Display Type section
and press the Save button.
5. To set one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations, select the Figure 48 Chart Æ
configuration name in the drop-down list. Data Display tab,
Custom display type
6. To delete one of the previously saved Custom Display configurations, select
the configuration name in the drop-down list and press the Delete button.
7. You can set your Custom Display the same as the Base, Standard, or All other display types. To do
so, press the Set by button and select the display type you need from the context menu.
5.6.3 Supplementary Data
The Jeppesen chart database includes supplementary data in addition to cartographic data. The
supplementary data can be used in voyage planning and other navigational purposes. The supplementary
data is included in the database as supplementary data layers.
The supplementary data are tides and tide currents, GMDSS areas, SAR regions, improved background and
overview charts, and terrain data. You can choose to display or hide the supplementary data layers on the
chart.
To display/hide the supplementary data of a specified database, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Settings tab. The supplementary data display is configured in the
Supplementary Chart Info section.
Figure 49 Chart Æ Data Display tab, Supplementary Chart Info

2. In the Databases drop-down list, select a database. If the database contains supplementary data layers,
they will be listed in the pane below.

3. To display a supplementary layer data, set the checkbox to the left from the section name. The data will
be displayed immediately. To hide a supplementary layer data, clear the checkbox near the data layer
name.
5.6.4 Depth Areas Presentation
Depth areas presentation is configured in the Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab, in the Contours section. In
the section values of three contours are set: the safety contour, the shallow contour, and the deep contour.
The value of the safety depth is also set here. The contours values are used in the ECDIS for distinguishing
on the chart display between the safe and the unsafe water and for generating anti-grounding alarms.
Figure 50 Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab, Contours section

To set the contours values, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab.
2. Enter the depth values of the contours to the fields corresponding to the contours:
• Safety contour is the depth contour selected by the user that should not be crossed to avoid
grounding the ship. The contour is used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the display between the
safe and the unsafe water, for generating anti-grounding alarms, and for checking routes 23 .
• Safety depth – The depth defined by the mariner, e.g. the ship's draft plus under keel clearance, to
be used by the ECDIS to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this value. All
soundings that are deeper than the safety depth will be displayed in a light grey color, while
soundings that are less than or equal to the safety depth will be displayed in black.
• Shallow contour – The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the
display between medium shallow and very shallow waters. Medium shallow water area lies between
the safety contour and the shallow contour, and very shallow water area lies between the shallow
contour and the zero meter contour.
The shallow contour value should be less than that of the safety contour. The shallow contour value
is not used in other ECDIS functions.
• Deep contour – The contour set by the mariner and used by the ECDIS to distinguish on the
display between medium deep and deep waters. Medium deep water area lies between the deep
and safety contours and the deep water area is all water deeper than the deep contour. The deep
contour value is not used in other ECDIS functions.
3. To apply the Contour settings, press the Set Parameters button 24 .
23
If a particular electronic chart does not have the depth contour that is set in the Safety Contour field, the system will
automatically set the nearest deeper contour as the Safety Contour. For example, the safety contour value is set to
15 meters, if there is no a 15 meters contour on the chart but there are 10 and 20 meter contours, the 20 meter contour
will be considered the safety contour. In case there are no depth contours at all in the chart, the ECDIS will give the
alarm “Safety contour not available.”
24
There is a possibility that the chart has depth contours in it, but the ECDIS doesn’t recognize them. It happens
because the ECDIS only recognizes contours if they bound depth areas. In case you have doubts, open the Object Info
panel where you can see the depth contour objects and check if they bound depth areas or not (see chapter 5.4, Chart
Objects Information and Chart Legend).

The contours values are used to distinguish on the display between depth areas that are safe or unsafe for
navigation. The areas are filled with colors specified in standards. The colors are as follows 25 :
Depth Range Color
No. From To C-Map Presentation S-52 Presentation
1 Zero-depth contour Shallow contour Dark blue Dark blue
2 Shallow contour Safety contour Blue Blue
3 Safety contour Deep contour Light blue Green grey
4 Deep contour Unknown White Light green grey
5.6.5 Depth Settings

Sometimes the chart view may be overloaded with data. The ECDIS provides options to get rid of the
overloading. One of them is selective display of chart elements in the chart view. Chart elements that can be
displayed selectively are divided into four groups: depth elements, text elements, light sectors, and other
elements.
To display or hide elements from the Depth settings group, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Depth settings tab. In the tab, there is a list of depth
elements.
Figure 51 Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Depth settings tab

2. To display an element in the chart view, set the checkbox to the left from the element name; to hide the
element from the chart view, clear the checkbox. There are the following chart elements in the Depth
settings tab:
• Two shades – Only two depth areas are to be highlighted in the chart view: safe and unsafe water
areas. The safe water area is separated from the unsafe water area with the safety contour set in
the Contours section of the Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab.
• Shallow pattern – The depth are from the coast line to the safety contour is filled with a dedicated
pattern.
• Safe contour only – Turns off the display of all depth contours except for the safety contour. Used
for hiding depth contours, especially in areas with complex relief, to reduce cluttering.
25
The contours values are used to highlight four depth areas. To limit the highlighted areas to only two areas, set the
Two shades property in the Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Depth settings tab. In this case, safe and unsafe
waters are distinguished on the display.

• Safe depths – Turns on the display of soundings which are deeper than the safety depth set in the
Contours section of the Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab. In S-52 presentation, unsafe soundings
are black, and safe soundings are grey. In C-Map presentation, there is no difference in appearance
of the safe and unsafe soundings.
• Isolated dangers in unsafe waters – Isolated dangers in unsafe waters are marked with a
dedicated hazard symbol .

• Plain depth contour – Turns off the display of depth contours labels.
3. The settings take effect immediately after they have been set.
5.6.6 Text Settings
elements.
To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Text settings tab. In the tab, there is a list of chart text
elements.
Figure 52 Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Text settings tab

element from the chart view, clear the checkbox. There are the following elements in the Text settings
tab:
• Light info – Turns on the display of characteristics of lights. The information of a light is displayed
next to the light symbol. If the setting is off, the information about a light can only be obtained from
the Object Info panel.
• Periodic date – Turns on the display of objects with a periodic date of activity only during their
activity period. If the setting is off, the objects with periodic date of activity are always displayed on
the chart.
• Text (important) – Turns on the display of texts that have the ‘important’ category. These texts
contain the information important for navigation such as bridge clearance, depth values above point
obstructions, etc.
• Text (generic) – Turns on the display of texts that have the ‘generic’ category. These texts are
names of geographic objects such as countries, cities, islands, etc.
• Text (other) – Turns on the display of texts that have the ‘other’ category. These texts are names of
lights and other aids to navigation.
• Aids to navigation tooltip – Turns on the display of tooltips with information about aids to
navigation. The tooltips appear when the mouse pointer is over an aids to navigation object.
• National text – Turns on the display of object names in national languages in the chart if available.
The setting only works for the C-Map presentation.
• Mariner’s notes – Turns on the display of mariner's notes (see chapter 6.2, Mariner Objects).
5.6.7 Other Settings
elements.
To display or hide chart elements from the Other Settings group, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Other settings tab. In the tab, there is a list of chart
elements.
Figure 53 Chart Æ Chart Presentation Æ Other settings tab

element from the chart view, clear the checkbox. There are the following elements in the Other settings
tab:
• Plain borders – Turns on the display of borders of various special areas (caution areas, deep water
areas, etc.) as plain dashed lines. The setting only works for the S-52 presentation.
• INFORM symbol – Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the
Information attribute.
• Quality symbol – Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating the quality of the electronic
chart. The setting only works for the All Other display type.
The quality symbols correspond to so-called zones of confidence. There are six categories of the
confidence zones. The categories are defined by the quality of survey, in particular by the positional
accuracy, the depth accuracy, the seafloor coverage and typical survey characteristics. The
categories are the following (in brackets the position accuracy is given as an example): A1 (5m), A2
(20m), B (50m), C (500m), D (worse than 500m) and U (data not assessed).
For the S-52 presentation, the quality symbol looks as an ellipse with a ‘u’ letter
inside if the data are not assessed, or as a triangle with the zone of confidence mark
inside for other zones.
For the C-Map presentation zones of confidence are indicated with a dashed line.
To find out the category of the zone of confidence, open the Object Info panel with a right-click in
the chart view and select the Quality of Data object in the objects list. Check the Category of zone
of confidence in data attribute in the Attributes pane to the right.
• Picture symbol – Turns on the display of special symbols indicating objects with the
Pictorial representation attribute.
• Low accuracy ind. – Turns on display of special symbols indicating that the position of
an object is defined with low accuracy (the QUAPOS attribute of the object is set to any
other value than ‘surveyed’). The property is relevant for the following objects: point land
areas, point and area wrecks, and point and area obstructions.
• Text descr. symbol – Turns on the display of a special symbol indicating objects with the
Textual description attribute (the description may contain for example an extraction from a

pilot book).
• NOAA Navaids – Turns on the display of symbols of Aids to Navigation created using the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (USA) standards, rather than the INT1 standard. The
setting only works for the C-Map presentation.
• Overscale id – Applies a dedicated vertical pattern to the chart or the part of it that is over-scaled
(the chart display sale is twice more than the original scale of the chart).
• ENC boundary – Turns on the display of borders of the ENC coverage.
• Scale boundary – Turns on the display of borders of areas covered with charts of different scale
levels.
• Chart boundary – Turns on the display of chart borders.
• Lat/Lon grid – Turns on the display of the Lon / Lat grid.
• Use SCAMIN – Turns on the use of the SCAMIN (minimum scale) attribute of objects. If the setting
is on, objects with the SCAMIN attribute are removed from the chart view once the chart view scale
is less than the minimum scale of the object display.
5.7 Printing Charts
The ECDIS provides the possibility to print the chart currently displayed on the screen out.
To print out the chart, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Settings tab and press the Print Chart button. The Print preview window will
open.
2. To renew the chart image to be printed, press the Renew Preview button. The preview image will
display the most recent changes in the chart view.
3. To configure the properties of the print out, pres the Printer Setup button. The standard Print Setup
window will open where you can configure the print properties.
4. To print the chart out, press the Print button. The chart image displayed in the Print preview window will
be printed out.
Figure 54 Print preview window

6. VOYAGE PREPARATION
6.1 Correcting the Chart
The first step in preparing the voyage is making sure that your charts have all the latest updates applied to
them. You need to correct all applicable charts through the latest Notice to Mariners, Local Notice to
Mariners, and Broadcast Notice to Mariners, and ensure charts to be used are the correct edition.
The ECDIS provides two methods for correcting charts: automatic updating and manual updating.
6.1.1 Automatic Updating
Using the Automatic Updating function, you can automatically log on to the Jeppesen Marine Update Server
over the Internet and download updates for the currently installed database. An updates log of all chart
corrections is maintained. The Automatic Updating requires the system to be logged on to the Internet over
any communication channel.
To download chart updates over the Internet and to automatically register them, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Auto Updating tab and press the Auto Updating button. The Auto Updating pane
will open.
Figure 55 Data Æ Auto Updating tab, Automatic Updating function

2. Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop-down
list. If only one database is in view, the Databases drop-down list is not displayed in the Data Æ Auto
Updating tab.
3. Press the Download updates button to start downloading updates. You can monitor the downloading
process in the Processing field. All steps of the process are shown in the Processing drop-down list.
4. To check the size of available updates before downloading, press the Get size button. The updates size
will be displayed in the Processing field.
5. After updates have been received, they are automatically registered in the database. To see which
datasets have been updated and to access the list of updates, use the Updating Log and Review
Updates functions.
6.1.2 Semi-automatic Updating
Semi-automatic updating is an alternative to the fully automatic updating. When using the Semi Auto
Updating function, you should create and save a request for updates, send it to the updates server by email,
receive the updates by e-mail as well and apply them to the database manually 26 .
To download chart updates by e-mail and to register them manually, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Auto Updating tab and press the SemiAuto Updating button. The SemiAuto
Updating pane will open.
26
The updating service is a fully automatic service provided by Jeppesen Marine and replies are sent within 10 minutes,
unless there is some delay, over your email provider.

Figure 56 Data Æ Auto Updating tab, Semi Auto Updating function

2. Select the database to which you are going to download and apply updates in the Databases drop-down
list. If only one database is in view, the Databases drop-down list is not displayed in the Data Æ Auto
Updating tab.
3. Set the maximum return email size: select an option from the Maximum return email size drop-down
list. The option should be used if there is a limitation on the email attachment size from your email
provider, or the answer file needs to be stored on a floppy disk. Check with your email provider and set
the required size. The updating server will then divide the replies into several emails in order to comply
with these limitations.
4. Save the updates order: in the folders tree in the left-hand pane, select a directory to which the order file
will be saved and press the Save order button. Confirm the operation. The order file will be saved in the
specified directory.
5. Send the order file as an attachment to [email protected]. It is very important that you send the new
order file to the updates server and not the same file as before as this will result in duplicate update
being received.
6. After a short period of time, you will receive the answer from the Updates Server with updates attached
to it. Save the update files to a data storage device and connect the device to the system.
7. To install updates, select the folder where the updates files are stored in the folders tree and press the
Get updates from directory button. The updates will be extracted from files and registered in the
database.
6.1.3 Updating Log/Review Updates
During the updating process, the updates log is kept where the list of updated datasets is recorded, as well
as the list of all changed objects. In the list of changed objects, objects are grouped by hydrographic
organizations that issued the updates, by datasets to which the updates were applied, and by numbers of
files in which the updates are stored. You can view the both lists in the Data Æ Auto Updating Æ Updating
Log/Review Updates pane.
To view the list of updated charts and a complete list of updated objects, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Auto Updating tab and press the Updating Log/Review Updates button. The
Updating Log and Review Updates panes will open.
Figure 57 Data Æ Auto Updating tab, Updates Log and Updates Review

2. The Updates Log pane displays all charts (datasets) to which updates have been applied. The
information relating to each dataset includes: dataset name (the Name column), update status –
accepted or declined (the Status column), the number of updates applied to the dataset (the Number
column) and the date when the updates were applied (the Date column).
3. When the updates are imported from the S-57 format, the import log is kept. In case there were any
problems during the import process, the log file can be viewed: the Remark button becomes active, and
to view the log, just press it. In case there were no problems during the import process, the import log is
unavailable, and the Remark button remains dimmed.
4. The Updates Review list on the right part of the pane is made up of records of the updates sorted by the
updates issuing hydrographic offices; by datasets to which the updates were applied, and by numbers of
files in which the updates are stored. The tool tips should assist you in viewing long names and remarks.
Information about each correction is given in a short form. For example, it does not contain the past and
present cartographic object position but it is just written as “Modified”.
5. Double click on any correction in order to highlight it on the chart. The screen will be panned to the object
position and the scale changed to the original scale of the source chart. A small arrow will point to the
object that has been modified. To clear the highlight, press either the Clear Highlight button right above
the updates list or the Clear Highlight button in the upper right corner of the Data panel 27 .
6.1.4 Manual Updating
The Manual Updating function allows you to apply updates to the chart data manually. The main source for
updates is Notice to Mariners. The updates included in the Notices to Mariners are normally included in the
set of automatic updates. However, information about changes in the charts is published in the periods
between the issues of Notices to Mariners through various channels. The channels include NAVTEX,
NAVAREA, and other navigational communications and warnings.
Using the Manual Updating, you can apply the changes reported by official navigational organizations but not
issued as Notices to Mariners yet.
Using the Manual Updates function, you can add new objects to the chart data, edit and delete existing
objects.
Manual updates are registered in a separate chart layer that is not connected with existing charts: it is an
independent dataset called Extrascale dataset. When the chart is prepared to be displayed in the chart view,
it is overlaid with data from the Extrascale dataset. However, if you, when adding objects, indicate that they
are included in the Notices to Mariners, the changes are applied to the chart dataset which is currently
displayed in the chart view. The changes are applied to the chart dataset if the existing dataset objects are
edited.
Objects edited or added with Manual Updating are displayed in the chart view as regular cartographic
objects with a special symbol. All changes made by the Manual Updating function are registered in the
manual updating log. The log is displayed in the Manual Update tab in the Updates History pane where you
can view all the updates modification and reject any of them.
To view manual updates history, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Manual Update tab.
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database. In the History pane below, the history of manual
updates applied to the specified database will be displayed. The manual updates history is presented as
a tree structure where the first level is the dataset to which the updates were entered, the second level is
the updated object, and the third level is the list of actions applied to the object.
27
When a new database issue is installed, updates that have been included in the new issue of the database as regular
objects will be automatically removed from the hard disk.

Figure 58 Chart Æ Manual Update tab, manual updates history

3. To expand the list of objects click on the plus ‘+’ sign next to the dataset name. To collapse the list of
objects, click on the minus ‘-’ sign next to the dataset name.
4. To expand the list of actions performed with an object, click on the plus ‘+’ sign next to the object name.
To collapse the list of actions, click on the minus sign next to the object name.
5. To view detailed information about entries of the manual updates history tree, select the entry. The
information will be displayed in the pane to the right from the History pane.
6. To hide a manual update object, select its entry in the updates history tree and press the Removed from
display button. The object is hidden and the Removed from display button remains pressed. To display
the object again, select it in the history tree and outpress the Removed from display button.
7. To highlight the updated object in the chart view, double-click on one of the actions that have been
performed with the object or select the action in the actions list and press the Highlight button. The
ECDIS will highlight the object in the position and the state where it was plotted after the selected action.
To cleat the highlight, press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel.
8. To reject an update, select the updated object in the objects list, press the Reject button, and confirm the
operation. The object will return to its state before the update.
9. You can reject all updates applied to a dataset. To do so, select the dataset in the datasets list, press the
Reject button, and confirm the operation. All updates objects of the dataset will return to their initial
states. If you reject all updates applied to the Extrascale dataset, the dataset will be deleted 28 .
To add a manual update to the chart, do the following:
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database to which you want to add a manual update.
3. Press the Add New button. The Add New Object dialog will open.
Figure 59 Chart Æ Manual Update tab, Add New Object dialog
28
You can’t reject a single action only all actions performed with an object or all the objects updated in a dataset.

4. Select an object from the objects list. To find an object, use the Search function: enter the name of the
object to the Search field and press the Find button.
5. Geographic objects can have various geometry types. After selecting the object, set the object geometry
type. Select a Point, Line or Area option. The geometry types that are not available for the specified
object remain dimmed.
6. Clear the From Notice to Mariner checkbox if it is set and press the OK button. Adding manual updates
from notices to mariners is described below. The Attributes pane will open where you can set the values
of the new object attributes.
Figure 60 Chart Æ Manual Update tab, adding new object, editing attributes
7. To set an attribute value, select the attribute in the attributes list and enter the value to the Value field (or
select it from the drop-down list if available).
8. Set the object coordinates: either plot the object in the chart view using the mouse pointer or set the
object coordinates in the Metrics pane. To open the Metrics pane, press the Metrics button. To return
to the Attributes pane, outpress the Metrics button.
Figure 61 Chart Æ Manual Update tab, adding new object, editing metrics
9. Plotting the object in the chart view:
• To plot a node, left-click in the chart view. To add a next node, left-click in the chart view once more.
• To add a node between two nodes, move the pointer to the position on the line connecting the two
nodes where you want to add a node; left-click in this position: the new node will be created and it
will be attached to the pointer so that it will move with it; to plot the node left-click in the chart view
once more.
• To move a node, left-click on it to capture it with the mouse pointer, move the pointer with the node
to a new position, and left-click.
• To delete a node, right-click on it. To delete a point object while still in the add object mode, just
cancel the operation: press the Cancel button.
10. After the object attributes and metrics have been set, press the Save button to save the object or the
Cancel button to cancel the operation.

11. The Updated by dialog will open. Enter your name to the field – it is the name of the author of the
update. Press the OK button. The object will be displayed in the chart and added to the Manual Update
History list, the Added action will be added to the object actions list 29 .
To add a manual update to the chart from a Notice to Mariners, do the following:
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database to which you want to add a manual update.
3. Press the Add New button. The Add New Object dialog will open.
Figure 62 Chart Æ Manual Update tab, Add New Object dialog

4. Select an object from the objects list. To find an object, use the Search function: enter the name of the
object to the Search field and press the Find button.
5. After selecting the object, set the object geometry type. Select a Point, Line or Area option. The
geometry types that are not available for the specified object remain dimmed.
6. Set the From Notice to Mariner checkbox and press the OK button. The Add New Object from Notice
to Mariner dialog will open.
Figure 63 Add New Object from Notice to Mariner dialog

7. Select the database from the Databases drop-down list.
8. Enter the number of the Notice to Mariners to the Notice field.
9. Select the code of the data producing agency in the Source Producing Agency drop-down list (the
name of the agency will be automatically displayed in the field to the right).
10. Select the name of the chart to which the object will be added in the Source Identification Code drop-
down list (to view the selected chart, press the Show button). Press the OK button to continue the
operation or the Cancel button to cancel the operation.
11. If you press the OK button, the chart view is scrolled so that to display the specified chart and the
Attributes pane opens.
12. To set the object attributes and metrics, repeat steps 7 to 11 of the previous procedure 30 .
29
The new object is added to the Extrascale dataset.
30
If you add a manual update object from a Notice to Mariners, the object is added to the chart dataset specified in the
Source Identification Code field of the Add New Object from Notice to Mariners dialog.

To edit a manual update object, do the following:
2. In the databases drop-down list, select a database. In the History pane the list of updates applied to the
specified database will be displayed.
3. Find the updated object you want to edit in the list. To select the object, double-click on the last action
performed with the object or select the last action and press the Highlight button. The object will be
selected and you can start editing it.
4. To edit the object attributes, press the Attributes Edit button. The Attributes pane will open where you
can edit the object attributes. After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them.
Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK. The object appearance will change to reflect
the attributes changes and the Modified action will be added to the object actions list.
5. To edit the object metrics, press the Metrics Edit button. The Metrics pane will open where you can edit
the object metrics. The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table. After
all changes have been made press the Save button to save them. Enter your name to the Updated by
window and press OK. The object will be moved to the new position and the Moved action will
be added to the object actions list.
6. To delete an object, select it and press the Delete button. Enter your name to the Updated by window
and press OK. The object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action will
be added to the object actions list 31 .
To edit a chart object, do the following:
1. Select the object in the chart view. Right-click on the object to open the Object Info panel, find the object
entry in the objects list, and double-click on the entry to highlight it in the chart view.
3. To edit the object attributes, press the Attributes Edit button. The Attributes pane will open where you
can edit the object attributes. After all changes have been made press the Save button to save them.
Enter your name to the Updated by window and press OK. The dataset to which the edited object
belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there, the object appearance will change to reflect the
attributes changes and the Modified action will be added to the object actions list.
4. To edit the object metrics, press the Metrics Edit button. The Metrics pane will open where you can edit
the object metrics. The metrics can be edited both directly in the chart view and in the metrics table. After
all changes have been made press the Save button to save them. Enter your name to the Updated by
window and press OK. The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if
it is not there, the object will be moved to the new position, the object symbol in the previous position will
be crossed with a red line, and the Moved action will be added to the object actions list.
5. To delete the object, press the Delete button. Enter your name to the Updated by window and press
OK. The dataset to which the edited object belongs will be added to the datasets list if it is not there, the
object will marked as deleted in the chart view and the Deleted action will be added to the
object actions list 32 .
6.2 Mariner Objects
Mariner Objects is a tool developed for the mariners to be able to plot their own notes and marks to the
chart. Mariner objects are entered to an independent chart layer. Thus, they do not affect other ECDIS
functionality and are used exclusively to display mariner's notes. There are seven types of mariner objects
available in the ECDIS.
¾ Mariner objects are the following:
31
There are chart objects that can be created using manual updating, but cannot be edited or deleted. The objects are:
Unsurveyed area, Pontoon, Hulk, Floating dock, Dredged area, Depth area, Land area (line, area).
32
If you edit a manual update object, all changes are done in the Extrascale dataset. If you edit a chart object, all
changes are done in the chart dataset.

• Clearing line – a line object: a straight line, drawn through leading marks. A ship moving along
such line will clear certain dangers or remain in the best channel. The line can be drawn though one
or two marks. There are three categories of clearing lines available: Not more than (NMT), Not less
than (NLT), and Not defined.
If the category of the clearing line is NMT, the bearing from the own ship to the mark should always
remain less or equal to the bearing of the clearing line for the ship to clear the danger. If the
category is NLT, the bearing from the own ship should always remain more or equal to the bearing
of the clearing line. The Not defined category is used if the clearing line is drawn through two marks
and the own ship location control is carried out using the range line between the two marks, rather
than the bearing to one of the marks.
• Danger highlight – a point or area object highlighting a danger.
• Event – a point object indicating the position of the own ship at the moment of some event.
• Mariners’ feature – a point, line, or area object used to highlight an area on the chart that should
attract attention of the mariner because of some effect it can have on navigating across it.
• Mariners Note – a point object presenting textual information from the mariner related to certain
coordinates. Depending on the importance of the information, you can set two categories of the
Mariners’ note: ‘information’ for general information or an unimportant note and ‘caution’ for
important information, danger, instructions, or orders.
• Manufacturers feature – a feature or information added by the manufacturer of the ECDlS.
Examples are a caution or information symbol for cursor picking to read out the information on the
alphanumeric display; additional chart information not available in the ENC; manufacturers' value-
added feature; etc.
• Position – a point object indicating the own ship position fix. The position fix can be calculated or
received from various positioning devices.
• Tidal stream or current vector – a point object indicating a predicted or actual tidal stream or
current vector with effective time and strength.
In the table below, geometry types, attribute sets, and categories of mariners’ objects are described.
Geometry Type and Presentation

Object Attributes Category
point line area
Information
Scale maximum undefined
Clearing line – – Scale minimum NMT (not more than)
Category of clearing NLT (not less than)
line
Information
Danger highlight – Scale maximum no
Scale minimum
Information
Object name
Scale maximum
Event – – Scale minimum
no
Local time
User’s remark
Information
Object name
Scale maximum
Mariner's feature no
Scale minimum
Local time
User's remark

Geometry Type and Presentation

Information
Scale maximum
Scale minimum undefined
Mariner’s note – – Category of information
mariner's note caution
Local time
User's remark
Information
Object name
Manufacturer's Scale maximum
no
feature Scale minimum
Local time
User's remark
undefined, dead
reckoning, estimated,
Scale minimum visual, astronomical,
Input identifier Radar, Decca, GPS,
Glonass,
Position – – Local time Loran/Tchaika,
Position finding MFDF, Omega,
method Transit/Tsikada, dGPS,
dGlonass, dOmega,
dLoran, dDecca
Orientation
Scale minimum
undefined
Tidal stream or Category of current
current vector – – and tidal stream
predicted
actual
Current strength
Local time
6.2.1 Creating and Editing Mariner Objects

To create a mariner object, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab and press the Create New button. The Select an Object dialog
will open.
Figure 64 Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab

2. In the Select an Object dialog, select an object type and press the OK button. The ECDIS will switch to
the mariner object edit mode and the object editing tab will open
Figure 65 Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab, Select an Object dialog

3. In the object editing tab, select the object geometry type. To do so, check one of available options for the
geometry type.
Figure 66 Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab, Mariners Feature object editing tab
4. Fill in the values of attributes. A mariner object can have one or several of the following attributes:
• Information – information about the object, is not displayed in the chart view;
• Scale maximum – the maximum scale at which the object starts to be displayed in the chart view;
• Scale minimum – the minimum scale at which the object is displayed in the chart view; if the
attribute is not set, the object is displayed at all scales;
• Category – category of the object; often defines the object appearance;
• Object name – the name or the number of the object;
• Local time – time of the observation; clear the checkbox in the Local time field and the attribute
will be ignored;
• User's remark – information related to the object and entered by the user;
• Input identifier – name or initials of the object author;
• Position finding method – for Position only – select method of the position determination from the
drop-down list;
• Orientation – for currents only – direction of the current in degrees;
• Current strength – fro currents only – speed of the current in knots.
5. Plot the object in the chart view:
• Point object – move the mouse pointer to the chart view and left-click in the selected position to
plot the object. To move the object, left-click in a different position: the object will be moved to the
new position. You can also drag the object to a different position. To do so, left-click on the object to
“capture” it with the mouse pointer, drag the object to a new position, and left-click once more to plot
the object there.

• Line object – move the mouse pointer to the chart view and plot the line nodes using the left
mouse button. You can perform the following operations with the nodes:
− To add a new node, left-click in a selected position: the node will be plotted in the chart view.
− To move a node, left-click on the node to “capture” it, move the mouse pointer with the node
to a new position, and left-click to plot the note.
− To delete a node, right-click on it.
− To insert an intermediate node, left-click on the line between two nodes: the new node is
created in the position of the pointer. The node is attached to the pointer and you can move
it. Move the node to its position and left-click to plot it in the chart view.
− To add a node in the beginning or in the end of the line – when you plot a line object adding
nodes one after another, the mouse pointer and the last node are linked with a line marker
that indicates the length and position of the next line section. To add a node to one of the line
edges, move the mouse pointer to the edge node, the marker line will connect the pointer and
the node – now you can plot new nodes.
• Area object – to plot an area object, plot the object nodes in the chart view. Nodes of area objects
should be edited in the same way as nodes of line objects.
6. To save the new mariner object, press the Save button. The object will be added to the objects list. To
cancel the object creation, outpress the Edit button and say ‘no’ to saving the object.
To edit a mariner object, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab and select an object in the objects list. You can also select the
object directly in the chart view: make sure that the Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab is open, find the object
in the chart view, and right-click on it. The object will be highlighted and marked with an arrow symbol. To
clear the highlight, press the Clear highlight button in the upper right corner of the Chart panel.
2. Press the Edit button to switch to the mariner objects edit mode and to open the object editing tab.
3. Change the object attributes and position using the same operations as when creating an object (see
above).
4. To save the changes, press the Save button. To cancel changes, outpress the Edit button and say ‘no’
to saving the changes.
5. To delete an object, select it, press the Delete button and confirm the operation.
6.2.2 Export/Import of Mariner Objects
Mariner objects are mainly intended for the use of the mariner. However, they can be exported to an external
file that can be used for various purposes. Exported objects are written to a file with the DAT extension.
Mariner objects can also be imported to the ECDIS.
To export a mariner object, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab and press the Export/Import button to switch to the
export/import mode.
Figure 67 Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab, export/import mode

2. Create the list of objects to export: add mariner objects from the objects list to the Selected Objects list.
Use the selection buttons:
• Add Object – adds a selected object to the Selected Objects list; Add All Objects –
adds all mariner objects to the Selected Objects list;
• Remove Object – removes a selected object from the Selected Objects list; Remove
All Objects – removes all objects from the Selected Objects list;
• Select Visible – adds mariner objects that are currently displayed in the chart
view to the Selected Objects list, all previously added objects are removed from the Selected
Objects list.
• Select Last Imported – adds last imported mariner objects to the Selected
Objects list.
3. Press the Export button. The Export mariner objects dialog will open.
4. In the Export mariner objects dialog, indicate the folder where the file will be saved, change the file
name is necessary (default file name is mariner_objects.dat), and press the Export button. Objects
file will be saved in the specified folder.
5. To return to the editor, press the Editor button.
To import a mariner object, do the following:
1. Open the Chart Æ Mariner Objects tab and press the Export/Import button to switch to the
export/import mode.
2. Press the Import button. The Import mariner objects dialog will open.
3. In the Import mariner objects dialog, select the folder where mariner objects files are stored. The list of
files will be displayed in the right-hand pane of the dialog window.
4. Select the mariner objects file to import to the ECDIS and press the Import button.
5. The mariner objects from the file will be imported to the ECDIS and added to the list of other mariner
objects.
6. To return to the editor, press the Editor button.
6.3 Charts Catalogue
The Chart Catalogue allows you to obtain detailed information about charts belonging to a specified
database.
Using the Chart Catalogue function, you can find any chart of a specified database you are particularly
interested in and view it in the chart view. You can also display boundaries of charts grouped into scale
levels in the chart view.
6.3.1 Searching Charts Catalogue
In the Charts Catalogue, you can obtain information about any particular chart and view the chart on the
screen.
To search the chart catalogue, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Chart Catalogue tab.

Figure 68 Data Æ Chart Catalogue tab

2. Select a database in the databases drop-down list. The list of charts grouped by issuing organizations
will be displayed in the pane under the databases drop-down list.
3. To expand a group, click on the plus ‘+’ sign next to the group name. In the expanded list, names of
charts will be presented. To collapse the group, click on the minus ‘-’ sign next to the group name.
4. Select a chart to view information about it in the pane to the right from the charts list. To scroll the chart
view so that to display a specified chart, double-click on the chart name in the charts list.
Figure 69 Data Æ Chart Catalogue tab, chart information pane

5. To use the Find option for searching charts, enter the name of the source paper chart to the Find field.
As you are entering the name symbols, charts which have the symbols you are entering in their names
will be selected in the catalogue. Keep entering the chart name symbols until you find the right chart.
6.3.2 Viewing Chart Boundaries by Scale Levels
All charts in the Jeppesen Marine chart database are divided into groups according to their scales and
intended usage. The groups are called scale levels (see chapter 5.2, Scaling the Chart View). Using the
Chart Catalogue function, you can display boundaries of charts in the chart view by scale levels.
To display chart boundaries by scale levels, do the following:
1. Open the Data Æ Chat Catalogue tab.
2. Select a database in the databases drop-down list.
3. In the Chart Boundaries section, check checkboxes next to the scale level names and press the Apply
button. Boundaries of charts assigned to the selected scale levels will be displayed in the chart view.
4. Use the Mark All button to mark all the scale levels, and the Clear All button, to unmark all the scale
levels.

Figure 70 Data Æ Chart Catalogue tab, boundaries of coastal and coastal/approach charts
6.4 Route Planning and Plotting
6.4.1 Automatic Route Planning
The ECDIS provides the possibility to automatically plan and plot the route. The route is calculated using the
database of pre-planned routes connecting a number of ports of the world.
To plot a route automatically, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Route Finder tab.
Figure 71 Route Æ Route finder tab

2. Add waypoints of the route to the waypoints list in the Itinerary tab. There are two ways of adding
waypoints:
a. add ports from the ports list to the itinerary (see the description of the procedure below);
b. add waypoints by selecting them directly in the chart view (see the description of the procedure
below).
3. Edit the waypoints list (see the description of the procedure below).
4. Calculate the route (see the description of the procedure below).
5. Apply restrictions to the route calculation in case the calculated route leads through narrows, channels or
straits you do not want it to. There are two ways of applying restrictions:
a. forbid using channels and straits for route calculation by indicating it in the Disabled Passages list
(see the description of the procedure below);

b. apply restrictions directly in the chart view (see the description of the procedure below).
6. Recalculate if necessary and save the route (see the description of the procedure below).
To add a port from the ports list to the waypoints list, do the following:
1. Find the port in the ports list. Ports are sorted by port name or by country where ports are located,
depending on the option selected in the Sorted drop-down list below the ports list. Ports that service
vessels with a draft less than the current draft specified for the own ship are disabled in the list and you
cannot select them for your route.
2. Select the port in the ports list (if the Highlight checkbox is ticked, the port will be marked with a green
circle on the chart) and press the Add to Itinerary button. The port will be added to the waypoints list.
3. To find a port in the ports list quickly, you can use the Search function. Switch on the search by port
(select By Port option in the Search Options drop-down list) and type the port name into the Search
field. The first port found that begins with the typed symbols will be highlighted in the list. Continue typing
until required port is highlighted.
4. If the By Country search option is selected, the search is carried out by country. Enter the country name
to the Search field and the first port (alphabetically) of the country will be highlighted. When using the
search by country, sorting by country is also recommended.
5. To scroll the chart view to a port, select the port in the list and press the Go to Position button.
6. To highlight all ports included in the ports list, check the Highlight All checkbox. All ports will be marked
with yellow circles in the chart view.
To add a waypoint to the waypoints list, do the following:
1. Press the Add Waypoints button in the Itinerary tab.

2. Move the mouse pointer to the waypoint position in the chart view and left-click holding down the SHIFT
key. The waypoint will be plotted on the chart as a violet circle and added to the itinerary.
3. Outpress the Add Waypoints button.
To edit the waypoints list, do the following:
1. To remove a port/waypoint from the list, select the port/waypoint and press the Remove button.
2. To move a port/waypoint down or up in the list, select the port/waypoint and press the Move up or
Move down button.
3. To clear the list (remove all ports/waypoints), press the Clear All button.
4. When the Highlight Ports option is checked, all ports in the list are displayed on the chart
as white circles and the port selected in the list is shown as a violet circle.
5. To change the screen position so that the port selected in the list were in the screen center, press the Go
to button. It will also be marked with an arrow.
To calculate the route, do the following:
1. Add all ports and waypoints you want to include in the route, edit the ports/waypoints list, and press the
Calculate button.
2. The ECDIS will calculate the shortest route of all routes available by taking into account your current
draft. The calculated route will be marked on the chart as a yellow line.
To add restrictions to the route calculation by disabling passages, do the following:
1. Open the Disabled passages tab and check the passages you want to close for route calculation.

Figure 72 Route Æ Route Finder tab, Disabled Passages tab

2. In order to allow or forbid sailing through all passages use Mark All and Clear All buttons.
3. To allow using inshore traffic zones for route calculation, check the Inshore traffic allowed checkbox.
The route can be calculated outside Traffic Separation Schemes but can be shorter.
4. To allow using rivers for route calculation, check the Use rivers checkbox.
5. If the Highlight checkbox is ticked the passage will be marked on chart when selected.
6. To scroll the screen to the selected passage, press the Go to Position button. The passage will also
be marked with an arrow symbol.
7. Once you have added all your restrictions, recalculate the route: press the Calculate button. This time all
added restrictions will be taken into account.
To add restrictions to the route calculation by plotting them in the chart view, do the following:
1. Press the Add restriction button .

2. Draw a line or an area that will indicate the restricted zone on the
chart. To plot a point, left-click in the chart view; to delete a point,
right-click on the point; to move a point, left-click on the point to
capture it with the mouse pointer, move the point to a new location,
and left-click to release it.
3. To save the added restriction, press the Save restriction button
that has appeared in place of the Add restriction
button.
4. Confirm or cancel the operation. To confirm the operation, press the
Yes button, the restriction will be added. You can add as many
restrictions as you like.
Figure 73 Adding own restriction
5. To remove all manually entered restrictions, press the Remove all
restrictions button . You can only remove all the added restriction.
6. Once you have added all your restrictions, recalculate the route: press the Calculate button. This time all
added restrictions will be taken into account.
To save the route, do the following:
1. Press the Save as Route button. The Create New Route dialog will open.
Figure 74 Create New Route dialog

2. Enter the route name and press OK.
3. The new route is added to the routes list in the Route Æ Route Planning panel where you can analyze,
check and correct the route if necessary.
6.4.2 Manual Route Planning
If you prefer to plot routes manually from the beginning to the end or if routes created automatically require
editing, use the manual route planning and editing functionality of the ECDIS. Using the functionality, you
can create new routes, edit existing routes, edit route schedules, add control points, check routes, etc.
To create a new route, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Route Planning tab and press the New button. The Create New Route dialog will
open.
Figure 75 Route Æ Route Planning tab

2. In the Create New Route dialog enter the name of the new route to the Enter name of a new Route
field and press OK.
Figure 76 Create New Route dialog

3. The new route will be created and added to the routes list. The ECDIS will switch to the route edit mode.
You can start plotting the route waypoints and enter other route information. More details about plotting
waypoints see below.
Figure 77 Route Æ Route Planning tab, creating a new route

4. After all waypoints and route information have been added, press the Save button to save the route. To
save the route under a different name, press the Save as button, enter the new name to the Save route
as dialog and press OK.
To plot waypoints of the route in the chart view, do the following:
• Plot waypoint in the chart view – Left-click in the chart view. A waypoint number (1) in an orange
circle will be plotted in the chart view. Move the pointer and you will see a thin red line linking
the point and the mouse pointer. The line marker can be useful for checking the leg and the second
waypoint position. To plot the next waypoint, left-click in a new position in the chart view. The
second waypoint (2) will appear. The next left-click will plot the next waypoint and so on.
• Add waypoint to the waypoints table – To add a waypoint to the route using the keyboard, enter
the waypoint latitude and longitude to the LAT and LON fields of the WPT table. To do so, Left-click
in the LAT field of the WPT table to start entering the latitude, the 00°00.000´ value will appear,
enter your value for the waypoint latitude using the keyboard. Then enter the waypoint longitude to
the LON field. The waypoint will appear in the chart view in the set coordinates 33 .
• Move waypoint – To change the position of a plotted waypoint, click with the left mouse button on
the waypoint, it will be captured by the mouse pointer. Move the waypoint to a new position and
release it by clicking with the LEFT mouse button once more.
• Insert waypoint before the first one – Move the mouse pointer over the first waypoint. The line
marker will be linked to it instead of the last waypoint. Left-click to plot a new point before the first
one. The new waypoint becomes the first waypoint of the route. Move the mouse pointer over the
last waypoint, wait for the line marker to link the last waypoint and the pointer, and resume adding
waypoints from the last one.
• Insert waypoint between two existing waypoints – In order to insert a waypoint between two
existing waypoints move the mouse pointer over the leg between them, a special symbol will appear
. Left-click in the new position, a new waypoint will be created, the waypoint is attached to the
pointer. Choose the waypoint position and left-click to plot the waypoint.
• Delete waypoint – To delete a waypoint, move the mouse pointer over it. The line marker will
disappear and a special symbol will be displayed. Right-click on the waypoint to delete it.
• Panning and zooming in or out – While you are in the Edit mode any left-click plots a new point.
To pan the chart view, move the mouse pointer to the window border in the direction you want to
move the chart view. When the pointer changes to an arrow , left-click and the chart view will
move. To zoom the chart view in or out, use the Chart Scale panel options or the mouse wheel if
available. With the CTRL key held down, you can pan and zoom the chart view in the same way as
when in the regular chart view mode (to zoom out press and hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys
simultaneously).
¾ In the Route Æ Route Planning tab, the following operations with routes are available:
• Edit – To open a selected route in the route edit mode, select the route in the routes list and press
the Edit button. Only one route may be edited at a time. For more details, see chapter 6.4.3, Route
Edit Mode.
• Delete – To delete a selected route, select the route in the routes list, press the Delete button, and
confirm the operation.
If, when editing a route, you see that the route is colored red and one of waypoints is marked with a
cross, it means that the route legs are too close to each other and their deviation corridors (XTD) are
overlapped too much.
33
Waypoints are displayed in the chart view beginning with the 1:100 000 scale.

Figure 78 Warning about too close route legs position

If route legs are situated too close to each other it can cause problems for autopilot use; the route
legs cannot be checked for dangers and cautions. Try to avoid plotting route legs too close.
• Show – To show a selected route in the chart view, select the route in the routes list and press the
Show button. The chart view will be scrolled and zoomed so that to display the whole route on the
screen.
• Print – To print a selected route, select the route in the routes list, press the Print button, and
select the route table to be printed out from the drop-down menu. The table will be converted to the
*.doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the program is installed together with ECDIS).
Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing functionality (File Æ Print).
• Charts – To view the set of charts covering a selected route, select the route in the routes list and
press the Charts button. Borders of charts covering the route will be displayed in the chart view.
• Synchronize routes – To synchronize routes between the local and remote computers after
changes have been made to one of available routes, save the changes, return to the Route Æ
Route Planning tab (switch the route edit mode off), in the Synchronize routes with drop-down
list select computer to synchronize with and press the Synchronize routes with button. The
synchronization task will be added to the tasks list and executed in its turn (for details on the data
synchronization, see chapter 3.5.3, Routes Synchronization).
6.4.3 Route Edit Mode
In the route edit mode you can edit the route plan, change route parameters, add control points to the route,
and edit the route schedule.
To switch to the route edit mode, in the Route Æ Route Planning tab, select a route in the routes list and
press the Edit button. The route will be loaded and opened in the route edit mode.
Figure 79 Route Æ Route Planning tab, route edit mode
¾ In the route edit mode, the following operations with the route are available:
• Edit route plan – changes the WPT table (see chapter 6.4.4, Route Plan);
• Add control points – add entries to the CP table (see chapter 6.4.5, Adding Critical Points);
• Edit route schedule – change the Schedule table (see chapter 6.4.6, Editing Route Schedule);
• Save changes – to save all changes introduced to the route, press the Save button. Once the route
has been saved, the ECDIS switches the route edit mode off and the standard Route Æ Route
Planning panel opens.

• Save route under a different name – to save the route under a different name, press the Save as
button, enter the name in the Save Route as dialog, and press the OK button. The route with the
latest changes will be saved as a new route. The old route will remain in the routes list.
• View the route in the chart view – to view the route in the chart view, press the Show button. The
chart view will be scrolled and scaled so that to display the whole route in the chart view.
• Print the route plan (the WPT table) out – to print the route plan out, press the Print Route button.
The WPT table will be converted to the *.doc format and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the
program is installed together with ECDIS). Print the table using the Reach Text Editor printing
functionality (File Æ Print).
• View charts covering the route – to view charts that cover the route, press the Charts button.
Charts covering the whole selected route will be highlighted in the chart view.
• Check the route for dangers – to check the route for dangers, press the Check Route button. The
whole route is checked leg by leg and all found dangers and cautions are listed in the Dangers and
Cautions tabs. The tabs are created inside the Route Planning panel and organized in the same
way as the Object Info panel. Also all legs are marked with colors. These colors mean the
following:
− Blue – the Check route tool has not yet checked the leg;
− Red – the Check route tool has found dangers along the leg; presence of cautions does not
affect this highlighting;
− Yellow – the leg is a rhumb line with the length of more than 195 Miles and the tool is unable
to check it;
− No color – the Check route tool has found no dangers.
• Set default route parameters – to set parameters of the route that will be used as default when the
route is created, press the Parameters button, the Route Parameters window will open. Switch to
the Default Settings tab, set necessary parameters, and press the Apply button for the changes to
take effect. The following route parameters are available in the tab:
− SPD(kn) – speed on the leg, used by the ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from one
waypoint to the next one, in knots;
− XTD(NM) – allowable deviation from the track
along the leg from one waypoint to the next, in
nautical miles;
− RAD(NM) – turning radius at the waypoint, in
nautical miles;
− Great Circle – if the checkbox is set, route
legs are considered orthodromies; if the
checkbox is not set, route legs are considered
loxodromes;
− Show WP – turns on the display of waypoint
symbols in the chart view; if the checkbox is Figure 80 Route Parameters window,
not set, waypoint symbols are not displayed; Default Settings tab
− Show Speed – turns on the display of speed on the leg values in the chart view;
− Show Bearing – turns on the display of bearing on the leg values in the chart view;
− Show Named WP only (Schedule) – if the checkbox is set, only waypoints that have names
are displayed in the Schedule table. This allows displaying waypoints that are especially
important for the timetable.
• Change settings of several waypoints – to change settings of several waypoints at one go, press
the Parameters button, the Route Parameters window will open. Switch to the Change Settings
tab, set the waypoints, between which route parameters will be changed, set necessary
parameters, and press the Apply button for the changes to take effect. The following route
parameters are available in the tab:

− From WP/To WP – in the From WP and To WP drop-down lists set the range of waypoints,
between which route parameters will be
changed.
− SPD(kn) – speed on the leg, used by the
ECDIS to calculate time for navigating from
one waypoint to the next one, in knots;
− XTD(NM) – allowable deviation from the track
along the leg from one waypoint to the next, in
nautical miles;
− RAD(NM) – turning radius at the waypoint, in
nautical miles;
− Great Circle – if the checkbox is set, route
Figure 81 Route Parameters window,
legs are considered orthodromies; if the
Change Settings tab
checkbox is not set, route legs are considered
loxodromes.
6.4.4 Route Plan
The route plan can be viewed only in the route edit mode.
To view the plan of a specified route, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Route Planning tab.
2. Select a route in the routes list and press the Edit button. The route edit mode will be switched on.
3. In the route edit mode the route plan (WPT table), control points (CP table), and the route schedule
(Schedule table) are available.
Figure 82 Route Æ Route Planning tab, route edit mode, Waypoints table
4. The following information is automatically entered and appears in the waypoint table as you plot
waypoints on the chart:
• WP – Waypoint number, cannot be changed.
• LAT – Waypoint latitude.
• LON – Waypoint longitude.
• RAD(NM) – Assigned turning radius at the waypoint. Expressed in nautical miles. Default value is
set in the Route Parameters Æ Default Settings tab (press the Parameters button to open the
Route Parameters window).
• XTD(NM) – Cross Track Distance (XTD) – deviation from the track along the leg from this waypoint
to the next. The XTD value is used for determining dangers and cautions along the route.
Expressed in nautical miles. Default value is set in the Route Parameters Æ Default Settings tab
(press the Parameters button to open the Route Parameters window).
• SPD – Assigned speed on the leg from this waypoint to the next. Expressed in knots. Default value
is set in the Route Parameters Æ Default Settings tab (press the Parameters button to open the
Route Parameters window).

• RL – A choice of whether Rhumb Line ( ) or Great Circle ( ) sailing will be applied from this
waypoint to the next. To switch between the Rhumb Line and Great Circle sailing click in the sell.
Default value is set in the Route Parameters Æ Default Settings tab (press the Parameters
button to open the Route Parameters window).
• DIST(xx) – The distance from this waypoint to the next. Expressed in measurement units set in the
CONFIG Æ Units and Time tab, Distance Units section. The parameter value is calculated
automatically and is not editable.
• DTA(xx) – Distance to Arrival – distance from this waypoint to the last waypoint of the route
(destination). Expressed in measurement units set in the CONFIG Æ Units and Time tab,
Distance Units section.
• TTG – Estimated time that will be spent for sailing from this waypoint to the next.
• BWW – Bearing Between Waypoints – bearing from one waypoint to the next. Expressed in
degrees.
• Name – The name of the waypoint, optional parameter.
5. To save changes, press the Save button. All changes will be saved, and the route edit mode will be
switched off.
6.4.5 Adding Critical Points
You can specify a critical point on the route for the ECDIS to give an alarm if the own ship is going to reach
the critical point within a specified time or distance.
To set a critical point, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Route Planning tab, select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route
edit mode.
2. In the route edit mode, switch to the CP table. Now you are in the control points edit mode and can add
new and edit existing critical points.
Figure 83 Route Æ Route planning tab, Edit mode, critical points table
3. To plot a critical point in the chart view, move the mouse pointer to the critical point location and left-click.
The critical point will be added to the CP table. A critical point symbol is an orange circle with a cross
inside .
4. The other way to add a critical point is to enter its coordinates to the LAT and LON fields of the CP table.
5. To move a critical point to a new position, left-click on it to “capture” the point with the mouse pointer,
move the point to a new position, and left-click once more to plot it there.
6. After the coordinates of the critical point have been set, add the following information about the critical
point to the CP table:
• D/T – Indicate if the system will give alarm when approaching the critical point within a specified
time or within a specified distance. For distance, you should put a tick sign in the cell and for
time, a dash sign. To select a sign, click in the cell and the sign that is now displayed will change
to the other.

• DIST/TIME – The value of the distance or the time at which the system should notify the mariner
about approaching the critical point. This field depends on the D/T choice.
• Remark – Here you can enter the critical point information.
7. To delete a critical point, right-click on it.
8. To print the CP table out, press the Print CP button. The CP table will be converted to the *.doc format
and opened in the Reach Text Editor (the program is installed together with ECDIS). Print the table using
the Reach Text Editor printing functionality (File Æ Print).
switched off.
6.4.6 Editing Route Schedule
The route schedule is created together with the route itself. Times of navigation between waypoints are
calculated using the distance between the points and the own ship speed parameters. You can edit the route
schedule entries: change time of departure and allocate time for stops in waypoints.
To edit the route schedule, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Route Planning tab, select a route and press the Edit button to switch to the route
edit mode.
2. In the route edit mode, switch to the Schedule table. Now you can edit the route schedule.
Figure 84 Route Æ Route planning tab, Edit mode, Schedule table

3. The following route schedule parameters are displayed in the Schedule table:
• ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival – Estimated date and time of arrival to the waypoint. Can be set by
the user.
• ETD – Estimated Time of Departure – Estimated date and time of departure from the waypoint. Can
be set by the user 34 .
• Stop dur. – Stop duration at the waypoint. It can be applied for waypoints representing pilot stations
and ports, as a route can include a number of intermediate ports of call.
• Speed – Estimated speed in knots on the leg from this waypoint to the next. It is taken from the
WPT table and can be changed here. If you change the speed value in the Schedule table, it is
changed in the WPT table too.
• DIST – The distance from the waypoint to the next one along the leg. Expressed in measurement
units set in the CONFIG Æ Units and Time tab, the Distance Units section. The Distance is taken
from the Waypoints table.
• Time to Next – Time that will be spent to reach the next waypoint. It is calculated as speed divided
by distance.
4. Above the table, the total distance and the total duration of the route are displayed.
34
If you change the arrival or departure time/date, the ETA and ETD for each waypoint are changed accordingly.

5. To display only named waypoints in the Schedule table, check the Only named WP checkbox.
switched off.
6.4.7 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a File
It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference. This chapter explains how to
exports routes to and import them from files.
To export a route to a file, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To File tab.
Figure 85 Route Æ Export/Import tab, From/To File tab

2. Select a route to export in the routes table.
3. Enter the file name to the field above the folder tree and select the file format (INI or RTE/WPL) in the file
formats drop-down list.
• INI – Routes are saved in files with the *.route extension.
• RTE/WPL – Routes are saved in files with the *.rte extension. Unlike the *.route files intended
for the ECDIS only, *.rte files can be imported to many devices.
4. In the folder tree window, select the folder where the route will be saved. If in the folder there are other
route files, they will be displayed in the panel to the right from the folder tree.
To delete a route file from the files list, select the file, press the DELETE key, and confirm the operation.
5. To export the route, press the Export button. If the route is exported successfully, the message Route
was exported successfully will appear and the file name will be listed in the files list pane.
To import a route from a file, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To File tab.
2. In the folder tree, select the folder where the route file is stored. All route files stored in the selected
folder will be listed in the pane to the right from the folder tree.
In case the file you need is not on the list, make sure you have selected the right folder and check the file
format selected in the formats drop-down list. The format set in the formats drop-down list should be the
same as that of the route file you want to import.
3. Select the route file and press the Import button.
The route from the file will be imported to the
ECDIS and its name will be displayed in routes
list.
4. In case there are several routes in the specified
file (only for *.route files), you will be prompted
to select one of the routes in the Select Route
Name dialog.
In the Select Route Name dialog, you can also
change the output route name by entering a new
name to the Output Route Name field; and
Figure 86 Route Æ Export/Import tab, select the
Last update December 11, 2012 route to import 79
reverse the output route by checking the Reverse Route checkbox.
After the route has been selected and other parameters set, press the OK button to import the route.
6.4.8 Routes Export to and Routes Import from a Device
It is possible to import and export routes to store them for future reference. This chapter explains how to
exports routes to and import them from external devices.
To export a route to a device, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To Device tab.
Figure 87 Route Æ Export/Import tab, From/To Device tab

2. In the Device Name drop-down list, select the name of the device to which the route will be exported.
The list contains devices registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab.
3. In the Device Type list, select the type of the device.
4. In the Route to Export drop down list, select the route to export.
5. Press the Export button. The route will be exported to the specified device as RTE and WPL sentences.
Upon completion of the operation, the message will be displayed The route was successfully exported.
To import a route from a device, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Export/Import tab and switch to the From/To Device tab.
2. In the Device Name drop-down list, select the name of the device from which the route will be imported.
The list contains devices registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab.
3. In the Device Type list, select the type of the device.
4. Press the Import button. The ECDIS will start reading RTE and WPL sentences from the specified
device. Progress of the route import is displayed in the Progress section progress bar 35 .
5. Upon completion of the route import, the message will appear: Route X is received.
Would you like to import more routes? To go on with importing routes, press the Yes
button; to save the received route, press the No button.
6. To save the route, enter the route name to the Enter new route name dialog and
press the OK button. If you press the Cancel button, the route will be saved under a
default name. Figure 88 Enter
new route name
7. After the route has been saved, you can edit it in the Route Æ Route Planning panel.
35
In case the ECDIS failed to start receiving the route from the very first sentence, an error message will appear. In that
case close the message, cancel import by pressing the Cancel button in the Progress section, and press the Import
button once more.

6.5 Tides and Tidal Streams Data

Tides and currents information is included in the database as a supplementary section. The data include
locations of tidal and current stations, tidal ranges and other information.
You can turn on the display of tides and currents in the chart view and view information about each tide in
the Info Æ Tides Info tab and about each current in the Info Æ Streams Info tab.
6.5.1 Tides Information
Information about tides is available in the Info Æ Tides Info panel.
To access tides information, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Tides Info panel and set the Switch Tides On/Off checkbox to turn on the display of
tides information in the chart view. Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal stream stations
appear on the map (the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1:5 000 000) and the list of all
tidal stations is displayed in the pane below the Switch Tides On/Off checkbox.
2. To view information about a tide, you should select it. To select a tide, right-click on it in the chart or find
it in the tidal stations list and select it there. Information about the tide is displayed in the Tide Info
section.
Figure 89 Info Æ Tides Info tab
3. After the tide has been found, information about it (as well as the information
about a tidal stream) can be displayed for any date and time. To set the date
and time, use the time configuration tool (the same for Tides Info and
Streams Info panels). Using the tool you can do the following actions:
Figure 90 Time setting
• Choose the time type (UTC Time or Local Time) in the time type drop-
down list (Local Time is the difference between the UTC Time and the Time Zone).
• Set the date and time for calculation of tides and streams characteristics – set the date and time in
the date and time field (under the time type drop-down list).
• Make the current date and time the date and time for calculation of tides
and streams characteristics. To do so, press the Current Time button. The
date and time field will became grayed and the value in the field will
change to the current date and time value.
Figure 91 Selecting
• Results of tides and streams calculation can be presented either in UTC
time type for tides
time or in local time formats. Select the time format for the tides information
information
in the drop-down list in the lower left corner of the Tide Info section.
4. To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated in the chart view press the Play button. Each new
position of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period.
5. Tide Info – Displays tide or stream information in the selected station. General tides information includes
the following parameters:
• Time Zone – The time difference between standard (local) time of tide location and UTC.
• Tide Type – Can be Diurnal, Mixed Diurnal, Mixed Semi-Diurnal and Semi-Diurnal.
• From High Water – Time passed from the last high water event.

• From Low Water – Time passed from the last low water event.
• Current Water Level – Shows the water level of the specified Tidal object, at the time set in the
input time field.
6. Detailed information about the tidal object is represented in the Graph, High/Low Water and Water
Levels tabs:
• Graph – Tidal height (in meters) depends on time and is graphically expressed on the diagram. The
diagram background consists of three color zones. These zones graphically show night time (dark
grey), twilights (light grey) and daytime (white). The red vertical line on the graph marks the time
entered in the date-time field. In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram: when you
move the mouse pointer over the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal heights are shown
below allowing you to obtain detailed tidal information.
Figure 92 Tidal information, graph

• High/Low Water – Summary information about time and height of high and low water is given.
Figure 93 Tidal information, high/low water schedule

• Water Levels – Provides information about water level height predictions for next three days,
starting from the current day. The step of such predictions is one hour.
Figure 94 Tidal information, water levels plan

6.5.2 Tidal Streams Information
Information about tides is available in the Info Æ Streams Info panel.
To access tidal streams information, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Streams Info panel and set the Switch Tides On/Off checkbox to turn on the display
of tides and streams information in the chart view. Special yellow symbols of tidal stations and tidal
stream stations appear on the map (the symbols are displayed at scales larger than 1:5 000 000).
2. To view information about a tidal stream, you should select it. To select a stream, right-click on it in the
chart. Information about the stream will be immediately displayed in the tab.

Figure 95 Info Æ Streams Info tab

3. After the tidal stream station has been selected, you can get information about the stream for any date
and time. To set the date and time, use the date and time tool. The tool is described in detail in chapter
6.5.1, Tides Information.
4. To see tides and tidal streams symbols animated on the chart, press the Play button. Each new position
of a symbol corresponds to the tide or tidal stream characteristics in a ten minute period.
5. In the left-hand part of the panel the following general information about the selected stream is displayed:
• Time Zone – Time difference between standard (local) time of tidal stream and UTC.
• Direction – Direction of the tidal stream.
• Speed – Speed of the tidal stream.
• Flood/Ebb – Shows if the current tidal stream object is in the flood or ebb state.
6. Detailed information about the tidal stream is represented in the Graph and Speed/Directions tabs:
• Graph – Tidal stream speed (in knots) dependent on time is graphically expressed on the diagram.
The diagram background consists of three color zones. These zones graphically show night time
(dark grey), twilights (light grey) and daytime (white). The red vertical line on the graph marks the
time entered in the date-time field. Two display modes are available by switching the Direct.
Changes button:
− Considering the stream state - the button Direct. Changes is pressed. The vertical diagram
axis will be divided into two parts by a red horizontal line. In the top part, the speed of the
tidal stream in the flood state is shown; and in the bottom part, the speed of the tidal stream
in the ebb state is shown.
Figure 96 Tidal stream information, graph

− Not considering the stream state - the button Direct. Changes is outpressed. The diagram
displays absolute values of speed and direction without taking into account flood and ebb
states.

Figure 97 Tidal stream information, graph, absolute speed and direction values
The direction of the tidal stream is graphically shown for every hour as green arrows. The blue thin
graph line is a graph of water height levels of the tidal High/Low station related to the tidal stream, in
case the tidal stream is linked to any tidal station at all. Please note that it is only a schematically
drawn graph without any level marks.
In addition there is a very useful feature within the diagram. When you move the mouse pointer over
the diagram area the time and corresponding tidal stream direction and speed are shown below
allowing you to obtain more detailed information 36 .
• Speeds/Directions – summary information about time, speed and direction of a selected current
stream is given.
Figure 98 Tidal stream information, Speeds and Directions table

6.5.3 Astronomical Information
Information about celestial bodies is available in the INFO Æ Astro Info tab.
To access information about celestial bodies, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Astro Info tab.
Figure 99 Info Æ Astro Info tab
36
The graph can be displayed in the two modes not for all tidal streams. This option depends on the data for each tidal
stream stored in the database. In case it is impossible to define ebb and flood states for a tidal stream, the graph can
only be displayed in one mode, and the Direct. Changes button will not be displayed in the graph area at all.

2. If a tidal or a tidal stream station is currently selected, astronomical information is presented for
coordinates of the selected station and the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude
fields. For calculating the local time, if this time type is selected in the drop-down list at the bottom of the
time and coordinates pane, the time zone of the selected station is used (the time zone is displayed in
the Time Zone field). The Latitude, Longitude, and Time Zone fields are grayed and you can only
change date and time.
3. If no tidal or tidal stream station is currently selected, astronomical information is presented for
coordinates of the current chart view center, the coordinates are displayed in the Latitude and
Longitude fields. For calculating the local time, if this time type is selected in the drop-down list at the
bottom of the time and coordinates pane, select the time zone in the Time Zone drop-down list.
4. Using date and time tool, set the date and time you need astronomical data for. The Reset Time button
resets the time to the current time. The current time is displayed for the time zone selected in the Time
Zone and Daylight bias drop-down list.
Time format for the date and time display in the date and time field is set using the drop-down list in the
upper left corner of the tab. Time format for the display of astronomical information is set using the drop-
down list in the lower left corner of the tab.
5. Astronomical information is displayed in the three tabs inside the Info Æ Astro Info tab: the Sun, Moon,
and Planets tabs.
• Sun – Provides information about the current position and height of the sun above the horizon as
well as about the sunrise, twilight and sunset for the input date. The information is presented in
three tabs: Standard Transit, Civil Twilight, and Nautical Twilight.
• Moon – Provides information about the current position and height of the moon above the horizon;
also includes information on the rising, decline and the following phases of the moon for the input
date. The information is presented in two tabs: Moon Transit and Moon Phase.
• Planets – Provides information about planets selected in the planets drop-down list including the
current position, the height above the horizon, the rising and the decline for the input date for the
specified planet.
6.6 Weather Forecast: Download
IMPORTANT!
Weather downloading procedure can take considerable time during which other functions of ECDIS are not
available. It is highly recommended to download weather data when not in operational mode.
The ECDIS implements the functionality allowing you to use Jeppesen Marine Weather service. Using the
weather functionality you can download weather and cyclones forecasts, display weather data on the chart,
as well as analyze routes in terms of weather conditions along them and set alarms based on specified
values of weather parameters.
Weather forecasts are produced as GRIB files and cyclones forecasts as XML files. The forecasts are made
for a specified period of time and you can see the weather parameters change within the time period for
which the forecast was created. The forecasts include data for a number of weather parameters such as
pressure, wind, precipitation, etc. The parameters can be displayed on the chart separately.
Readings of weather parameters are provided at regular intervals of time. The time for weather display can
be set with a special time tool. If there is no reading of a weather parameter for the time set for the
parameter display, the parameter value will be interpolated.
To get access to downloading weather data you will have to download subscription first. Subscription
provides information on weather products and weather parameters available to you. You can download
weather data over the Internet using the HTTP connection or by e-mail.
6.6.1 Weather Subscription
After you have subscribed to the Weather Forecast Service you should download weather subscription to the
ECDIS.

Weather subscription information includes the list of products you have subscribed to. For each product the
following information is provided: type of the geographical weather model, validity period, coverage, area
limit, forecast period and time step, and a list of forecast elements provided for each product (pressure,
temperature, and so on). You are allowed to download only those weather products that are listed in your
weather subscription.
To download weather subscription, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Packages tab, press the Settings button and select the Subscription
option from the drop-down menu. The Weather Subscription window will open with a message that the
subscription is not found 37 .
Figure 100 Weather Æ Weather Packages tab

2. To obtain subscription, press the Request Subscription button in the lower left corner of the Weather
Subscription window.
Figure 101 Weather Subscription window, "The subscription was not found" message
3. Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters (see chapter 6.6.7,
Weather Download Setup) you will have to perform the following actions:
• Automatic communication – Internet (HTTP), E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)
1). Press the Request Subscription button.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, subscription
request will be sent and subscription received and downloaded automatically.
37
You are asked to download subscription information when you start downloading weather data for the first time (no
matter which downloading option you are using).

3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the subscription request is saved in the
Weather Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive
button in the Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
• Semi-automatic communication – E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Request Subscription button, the subscription request file will be generated and
saved to the Send folder. Request files have a predefined name format
‘request_xxxxx.xml.’
2). Send the subscription file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
3). You will receive the subscription file in the response e-mail, save the file to the Receive folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the subscription automatically.
• Manual communication – E-mail (Manually via Attachment)
1). Press the Request Subscription button.
2). Save the generated subscription file to any location on your computer. Request files have a
predefined name format ‘request_xxxxx.xml.’
3). Send the file as an attachment to an e-mail letter to [email protected]. You will receive
the subscription in the response e-mail.
4). Save the subscription to any location on your computer.
5). Download the subscription to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather Æ
Weather Packages tab and press the Import JWP button.
6). In the Open dialog window select the files to download and press the Open button. The files
will be downloaded to the ECDIS. If the received data package is split into several files,
download all the files of the package one by one; when the last file of the package is
downloaded (the order of downloading is of no importance), the package appears in the
Weather Packages window (for more details on the Weather Packages window, see chapter
6.6.6, Weather Packages Handling).
To view weather subscription, do the following:
option from the drop-down menu.
2. The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there.
Figure 102 Weather Subscription window

In case you have changed weather data subscription terms, you will have to renew weather subscription.
To renew weather subscription, do the following:

option from the drop-down menu.
2. The Weather Subscription window will open with subscription information displayed there.
3. Press the Request Subscription button. Your further actions on sending/receiving subscription depend
on the communication type set in the Setup Connection parameters (for details see the downloading
subscription procedure above) 38 .
6.6.2 Easy Mode Setup and Download
The Easy Mode download option is a preset option and allows you downloading weather forecasts with one
click.
This option allows downloading of all weather products listed in your subscription. Configure weather
download request using the Setup Easy Mode function.
After the request is configured you can order data by simply pressing the Download button in the Weather
Presentation (Easy Mode) or Weather Packages panels.
To download weather data using the Easy Mode option, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) or the Weather Æ Weather Packages tab.
Both these tabs have the Download button.
Figure 103 Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Figure 104 Weather Æ Weather Packages,
Mode), Download button Download button
1). Press the Download button to start the download and confirm the request in the Request
confirmation dialog.
2). In case the Automatic send/receive parameter is set in the connection setup, the data
request will be sent and data received and downloaded automatically.
3). If the Automatic send/receive parameter is not set, the data request is saved in the Weather
Packages tab in the waiting mode. To send the request, press the Send/Receive button in the
Weather Packages tab. Data will be received and downloaded automatically.
2). A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send folder. Request files have a
predefined name format ‘request_xxxxx.xml.’
3). Send the data request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
4). You will receive weather data files in the response e-mail, save the files to the Receive folder.
38
Weather subscription is renewed automatically every time you receive a new weather package.
5). The ECDIS will load the data automatically.
2). A data request file will be generated. Save the file to any location on your computer.
data files in the response e-mail.
4). Save the files to any location on your computer.
5). Download the weather data to the ECDIS. To download the data, open the Weather Æ
To setup the Easy Mode option, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Packages panel.
2. Press the Settings button and select the Setup Easy Mode option from the drop-down menu. The
Weather Download Request dialog will open.
In the request dialog you can add a product to the request, set the product parameters, remove a product
from the request, set a geographic area for which a forecast is required, set the period for which you
need weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.
Figure 105 Weather Download Request dialog, Easy Mode Setup

3. To add a product to the request, press the Add new product button and select the product you want to
add in the drop-down list. The product appears in the table and is removed from the Add new product
list.
4. To set the product parameters, click on the plus ‘+’ sign near the product name to expand the product
parameters list (to collapse the list, press the minus ‘-’ sign near the product name) and check those
weather parameters you want to receive.

Figure 106 Weather Download Request dialog, setting a product parameters
5. To remove a product from the request, press the product Remove button .
6. To set a geographic area to be covered by the forecast data, choose a predefined coverage from the
drop-down list or set your own coverage. To open the list of coverage options, press the arrow near the
current coverage name. To set a new coverage:
a. Press the arrow near the current coverage name and, in the drop-down list, select the Add New
Coverage option or press the Add New Coverage button . The Edit Coverage window opens.
Figure 107 Edit Coverage window

b. Initially the New Coverage boundaries are boundaries of your current screen view. You can set
new boundaries either by entering new coordinate values to the North, South, East, and West
fields (coordinate values are in degrees, minutes and fractions of minute) or by selecting a new
coverage on the screen.
c. To select a new coverage on the screen, move the mouse pointer to the edge of the coverage
displayed on the screen (a red frame). When the pointer changes to the horizontal resize pointer
, click the right mouse button and drag the coverage boundary holding the button. Release the
button when the coverage boundary is in the right place. You can also move the coverage: move
the mouse inside the selected area, the pointer will change to the move pointer , press the right
mouse button and move the coverage. Release the button when the coverage area is in the right
place. Coordinate values in the North, South, West, and East fields of the Edit Coverage window
change in accordance with selection on the screen.
d. After you have defined boundaries of the new coverage, press the Apply button to save the settings
in the list of coverage areas.
e. To restore initial coverage boundaries (the screen coverage boundaries set when the Edit
Coverage window has just been opened), press the Reset Area button.
f. To scroll the screen so that a specified coverage area was in the center of the screen, press the Go
to button.

g. To create a new coverage, press the New Coverage button. The name of the new coverage will
appear in the list. The default new coverage name is ‘New Coverage #x,’ you can change the name
to any name you like.
h. To delete a coverage, select it in the list of coverage options and press the Delete button.
i. To return to the Weather Request Download window, press the OK button. All new coverage
areas will be in the list of coverage areas. If you press the Cancel button, the new areas will not be
preserved in the list of coverage areas.
7. You can view a selected coverage area from the Weather Download Request dialog. To do so, press
the Go to Coverage button in the request table.
8. In the Period field, select time period for which you need weather forecast.
9. In the TimeStep field, select time step at which weather parameters readings from the weather package
are made.
10. In the Size field, an approximately estimated weather package size is displayed. The total size of the
request is displayed in the Total information panel at the lower right corner of the window.
11. The Forecast for box is only active for Historical Weather function and the Download at box is only
active for the Scheduled Download function.
12. To reset the Easy Mode data request to the default settings, press the Reset button.
13. To save the data request for the use, press the OK button. The Easy Mode request configuration will be
saved. The request is used each time you download data using the Easy Mode download option.
6.6.3 Overview and Coastal Download
The Overview and Coastal download options are preset options.
The Overview download option only allows downloading the Global – ECMWF 150 km weather model (the
European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 150 km grid) and Tropical
Cyclones data.
The Coastal download option only allows downloading the Global – ECMWF 50 km weather model (the
European Centre for Medium Range Weather Forecasting weather model with a 50 km grid) and Tropical
Cyclones data.
To download weather data using the Overview or Coastal download options, do the following:
Both these tabs have the Download button. Press the arrow near the button to open the download
options menu. Select the Overview or Coastal option. The Weather Download Request dialog will
open.
Figure 108 Weather Æ Weather Presentation Figure 109 Weather Æ Weather Packages,
(Easy Mode), Download button Download button
2. In the Weather Download Request dialog, you can set the product parameters, remove a product from
the request, set a geographic area for which a forecast is required, set the period for which you need
weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.

Figure 110 Weather Download Request dialog, Overview/Coastal request dialog

3. Set the data request: select product parameters in the Products field, set data coverage in the
Coverage field, select the forecast period in the Period field, and set the forecast time step in the
TimeStep field. Details about using the Weather Download Request dialog see in the chapter 6.6.2,
Easy Mode Setup and Download, the Setup Easy Mode procedure.
1). Press the Send Request button to send the request to the weather server.
request will be sent and the data received and downloaded automatically.
1). Press the Send Request button. A data request file will be generated and saved to the Send
folder. Request files have a predefined name format ‘request_xxxxx.xml.’
6.6.7, Weather Download Setup).

6.6.4 Custom Download
The Custom download option allows downloading all weather products listed in your subscription.
To download weather data using the Custom download option, do the following:
options menu. Select the Custom option. The Weather Download Request dialog will open.
2. In the Weather Download Request dialog, you can add products to the request, set products
parameters, remove products from the request, set geographic areas for which forecasts are required,
set periods for which you need weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.
Figure 113 Weather Download Request dialog, Custom request dialog

3. Set the data request: add products from the Add new product drop-down list, select product parameters
in the Products field, set data coverage in the Coverage field, select the forecast period in the Period
field, and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field. Details about using the Weather Download
Request dialog see in the chapter 6.6.2, Easy Mode Setup and Download, the Setup Easy Mode
procedure.
4. You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later. To
do so, press the Save Request button, in the Save As dialog, indicate the location where the file will be
saved, enter the file name, and press the Save button. The request configuration will be saved to an
*.xml file.
5. To download a previously saved request configuration, press the Load Request button, in the Open
dialog, select the request configuration file, and press the Open button. The request configuration will be
loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog.
6. After the request has been configured, you can download data. Depending on the communication type
set in the Setup Connection parameters (see chapter 6.6.7, Weather Download Setup) you will have to
perform the following actions:

6.6.5 Scheduled Download
If you would like to receive e-mails with weather package files at a given time each day, the Scheduled
download is the solution. The Scheduled download option allows downloading all weather products listed in
your subscription 39 .
To download weather data using the Scheduled download option, do the following:
options menu. Select the Scheduled option. The Weather Download Request dialog will open.
39
The Scheduled download option is available only for e-mail communication types.

2. In the Weather Download Request dialog, you can add products to the request, set products
parameters, remove products from the request, set geographic areas for which forecasts are required,
set periods for which you need weather data, and the time step of weather parameters readings.
Figure 116 Weather Download Request dialog, Scheduled request dialog

3. Set the data request: add products from the Add new product drop-down list, select product parameters
in the Products field, set data coverage in the Coverage field, select the forecast period in the Period
field, and set the forecast time step in the TimeStep field. Details about using the Weather Download
Request dialog see in the chapter 6.6.2, Easy Mode Setup and Download, the Setup Easy Mode
procedure.
4. You can save the current request configuration to a file to be able to use the same configuration later. To
do so, press the Save Request button, in the Save As dialog, indicate the location where the file will be
saved, enter the file name, and press the Save button. The request configuration will be saved to an
*.xml file.
5. To download a previously saved request configuration, press the Load Request button, in the Open
dialog, select the request configuration file, and press the Open button. The request configuration will be
loaded to the Weather Download Request dialog.
6. After the request has been configured, in the Download at box select or enter the time at which you
want to receive weather data every day.
7. Press the Send Request button. Depending on the communication type set in the Setup Connection
parameters (see chapter 6.6.7, Weather Download Setup) you will have to perform the following actions:
• Automatic communication – E-mail (SMTP/POP3), E-mail (MAPI)

8. If you want to stop receiving scheduled weather data, press the Delete all scheduled button in the
Weather Data Request dialog for Scheduled download. Take into account that you cannot cancel one or
several scheduled requests. You can only cancel all of the requests.
6.6.6 Weather Packages Handling
Each time you order a weather forecast, the request of the forecast is listed in the Weather Æ Weather
Packages tab. In the tab, you can see the progress of the request processing. After the data has been
received – weather data come from the weather server as data packages – entries for weather data requests
in the Weather Packages tab become entries for the received weather data packages. To be able to use the
data, you should unpack and load them to the ECDIS.
In the Weather Æ Weather Packages tab you can display detailed information about the data requests and
received data packages, download a weather package to the ECDIS in case it was received by e-mail,
initiate a send/receive operation in case it is not done automatically, display weather data received in a
package on the chart, delete a package, and save a package as a *.grb or an *.xml file.
Figure 117 Weather Æ Weather Packages tab
¾ The following data packages handling operations are available in the Weather Packages tab:
• Downloading weather packages to the ECDIS: Import of weather packages is only necessary in
case you are using the E-Mail (Manually via attachment) communication type.
With the E-Mail (Manually via attachment) communication type you will have files with weather
packages saved in some location on your computer. To be able to use the data you will need to
load the files to the ECDIS. To load weather packages, press the Import JWP button, in the Open
dialog select the packages files and press the Open button. The files will be loaded to the ECDIS.
• Viewing extended information about a data request or a data package: To view expanded
information about a data request that is being processed or a received weather package, select the
package in the packages table and press the Expand Info button (the button label will change to
Hide Info). The information will be displayed in the window below. To hide the information, press
the Hide Info button.

• Initiating the send/receive process: The Send/Receive button initiates the data exchange procedure
for a data request in case it is not done automatically. The data exchange procedure includes
sending the weather data request to the weather server and receiving and proceeding weather data
packages. The automatic send/receive should be set through the Setup Connection function (see
chapter 6.6.7, Weather Download Setup).
• Displaying weather data on the chart: The Display button displays weather data received in a
specified weather package on the chart. To display weather data, select a weather package in the
packages list and press the Display button.
IMPORTANT!
If a package is deleted without saving data to a GRIB or XML file (the Save button), you will not be able to
recover the data. To get the deleted weather data you will have to request and receive them once more.
• Deleting a weather request or a weather data package: The Delete button deletes specified
weather packages from the packages list. To delete a package select it in the packages list and
press the Delete button.
• Saving data to a GRIB or XML file: The Save button allows saving a specified weather data
package to your computer. The data package is saved as a GRIB or an XML file: weather forecast
data are saved to a GRIB file and cyclones data are saved to an XML file. To open the files use the
Open GRIB and Open Cyclones buttons on the Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) panel (see
chapter 6.7, Weather Forecast: Display).
6.6.7 Weather Download Setup
Weather forecast data are transferred over the Internet. In the ECDIS, you can use either HTTP (Internet) or
e-mail connection. The ECDIS uses the HTTP (Internet) connection by default and has to be connected to
the Internet to be able to transfer data. The connection with the weather server has to be configured through
the Setup Connection function.
To configure connection, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Packages tab, press the Settings button, and select the Setup
Connection option from the drop-down menu. The Setup Connection dialog will open.
Figure 118 Setup Connection window

2. Set the communication type: select the communication type in the Communication type drop-down list.
You can choose between HTTP (Internet) and e-mail connection. To comply with different ship or office
communication set-ups, you are offered four e-mail connection types: SMTP/POP3, Inbox via MAPI,
Folder Send/Recv, and Manually via Attachment. See detailed description of all communication
connections further on in the manual.

3. Set the data center: set the center on the continent where you are now to have data transferred faster.
Select the data center in the Data center drop-down list. So far, only the Europe data center is available,
please check for other available centers later.
4. Set the timeout – time period during which the answer from weather data server is awaited (relevant for
HTTP, SMTP/POP3, and Inbox via MAPI connections). Enter the timeout value in seconds to the
Timeout field.
5. Set the attachment size in the Attachment size field. The attachment size is the maximum size of a data
pack that can be attached to an e-mail sent to you (relevant for all e-mail connections). In case the set
attachment size is less than the size of the ordered weather package, the package is broken down into
several data packages that are sent to you in several e-mails. Set the parameter to {0} or {-1} if you want
weather packages of any size to be sent to you in one e-mail.
6. Set communication parameters in the Communication parameters section. Depending on the type of
communication you selected in the Communication type option, you will be given a possibility to
configure a set of parameters specific for the selected communication type.
7. After you have configured connection you can save settings for further use: press the Export settings
button, in the Save As dialog window, indicate location where the file with settings will be saved, enter
the file name and press the Save button. The settings will be saved to an *.xml file.
8. To load previously saved settings: press the Import settings button, in the Open dialog window select
the *.xml file with saved settings and press the Open button. The settings from the file will be loaded.
¾ The following communication types are available:

¾ Internet (HTTP): Automatic connection type. If you set the Internet (HTTP) communication type, the
ECDIS will use the standard HTTP protocol to send requests and receive weather data. You can
configure HTTP parameters in the Setup Connection window in the HTTP parameters branch of the
connection parameters tree.
Figure 119 Setup Connection window, Internet (HTTP) communication type

• Automatic send/receive: if the parameter is set, data requests are sent to the weather server
automatically; if the parameter is not set, data requests are put first to the waiting list in the Weather
Æ Weather Packages tab, and sent to the server on the user command.
• The HTTP proxy type parameter can be set to the following values:
− Direct connection – Use the option if you do not use proxy server to provide connection to
the Internet.
− Automatic discovery – Use the option if you do not know exact parameters of your proxy
server, or if you are not sure that your internet connection is provided through a proxy server.
Set this option and the program will find proxy server automatically.
− Manual configuration – Use the option if your internet connection is provided through a
proxy server and you know all parameters of the server.

¾ E-Mail (SMTP/POP3): Automatic connection type. If you set the E-Mail (SMTP/POP3) e-mail connection
option, the ECDIS is acting as an e-mail program and is using standard incoming and outgoing data
transfer protocols. In the Setup Connection window you can configure protocols settings in the E-Mail
Parameters branch of the connection parameters tree.
Figure 120 Setup Connection window, E-Mail (SMTP/POP3) communication type

¾ E-Mail (Inbox via MAPI): Automatic connection type. If you set the E-Mail (Inbox via MAPI) connection
option, the ECDIS will use the e-mail program installed on your computer to send data requests and
receive weather data files. For the ECDIS to be able to use your e-mail program, the program should
support MAPI (Messaging API). The ECDIS then processes received weather data and loads weather
packages automatically.
¾ E-Mail (Folder Send/Recv): Semiautomatic connection type. In case you use the E-Mail (Folder
Send/Recv) e-mail connection option, you need to set paths to two folders: Send folder (Send path) and
Receive folder (Receive path). Folders are set in the Folder Parameters branch of the connection
parameters tree.
• Send folder (Send path) is the folder where data requests are saved as *.xml files. The files have
a predefined name format ‘request_xxxxx.xml’ (you are not allowed to change request file
names). After a request file is generated and saved, send it as an attachment to an e-mail to
[email protected]. Weather data will be sent to you attached to the response e-mail.
• Receive folder (Receive path) is the folder where weather data files received from the data center
should be saved. The ECDIS checks the Receive folder periodically and when the program finds
data files there, it loads the weather package automatically. The loaded weather package is added
to the Weather Packages window.
Figure 121 Setup Connection window, E-Mail (Folder Send/Receive) communication type

¾ E-Mail (Manually via Attachment): Manual connection type. If you use the E-Mail (Manually via
Attachment) e-mail connection option, you will have to send request files and receive and install
weather packages manually. In this case request file is generated when you press the Send Request
button in the Weather Download Request window. Save the file to any location on your computer and
send it as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected]. You will receive a response (e-mail)
with weather package files attached to it. Save the files to any location on your computer. To load the
weather package files, use the Import JWP function in the Weather Packages panel 40 .
After you set the Internet connection up, you can test it. Testing the connection allows you to see if you have
set it correctly. Testing procedure involves two operations: sending data to the server and receiving data
from the server.
To test the connection with the weather server, do the following:
1. To start testing, go to the Weather Æ Weather Packages panel, press the Settings button and select
the Test Connection option from the drop-down menu. The Test Connection window will open.
Figure 122 Test Connection window

2. Press the Test connection button. Testing operations status is displayed in the Send data and Receive
data fields. Operation statuses can be the following:
• N/A – no test was started;
• Waiting – testing of the operation has not started yet;
• Testing – testing of the operation is being performed at the moment;
• Error (error description) – an error occurred during testing of the operation, the error description is
given in brackets;
• Passed – the operation was successfully terminated;
• Unknown – the operation was not tested;
• Failed (failure reason) – the operation testing failed due to some reason; the reason of failure is
given in brackets.
3. Testing procedures depend on the communication type set in the Connection setup:
• Automatic connection types – Internet (HTTP), E-Mail (SMTP/POP3), E-Mail (Inbox via MAPI)
1). Press the Test connection button.
2). Test request will be sent and test response received and downloaded automatically.
3). The procedure may take time, but you can close the Test Connection window and proceed
with your other activities. When you open the Test Connection window next time, you will see
the status of the test.
• Semiautomatic connection types – E-mail (Folder Send/Recv)
1). Press the Test connection button, the test request file will be generated and saved to the
Send folder.
2). Send the test request file as an attachment to an e-mail to [email protected].
40
When using an e-mail connection, make sure to configure settings correctly. Connection settings configuration is a
one-time job that should be done by an IT-specialist to ensure the right options and settings are used.

3). You will receive the test response file in the response e-mail, save the file to the Receive
folder.
4). The ECDIS will load the test file automatically.
• Manual connection type – E-mail (File via Attachment)
1). Press the Test connection button.
2). Save the generated test request file to any location on your computer.
the test response file in the response e-mail. Save the response file to any location on your
computer.
4). Download the file to the ECDIS: open the Weather Packages panel (Weather Æ Weather
Packages) and press the Import Weather Data File button. In the Open dialog window,
select the response file and press Open. You will see no indication of data actually being
loaded, but the Receive data operation test will be performed.
6.7 Weather Forecast: Display
6.7.1 Turning on and Configuring the Display of Weather Data
Weather data can be displayed in the chart view as an additional data layer. To display the data you should
turn the data display on and configure the data display parameters.
To display the data from a weather data package, do the following:
1. Load a weather data package to the ECDIS (see chapter 6.6, Weather Forecast: Download).
2. In the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Toggle Weather button. This
button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view.
3. In the Weather Æ Weather Packages tab, select the loaded data package in the packages table and
press the Display button. The data will be displayed in the chart view.
4. If you can’t see the data, make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather
data.
5. When the display of weather data is on, values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are
displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view.
To turn the display of data from a weather file, do the following:
1. In the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Toggle Weather button. This
button is a switch which displays or hides weather data in the chart view. When the button is pressed, the
ECDIS opens *.grb or *.xml files that were opened last.
2. If there were no weather files opened or you need to open different files, use the Open Grib and Open
Cyclones buttons. The Open Grib button opens *.grb files with weather forecasts saved there, and the
Open Cyclone button opens *.xml files with cyclones data.
3. To open a file, press the Open Grib or Open Cyclones button, in the Open dialog select the file to open
and press the Open button. The data from the file will be displayed in the chart view.
4. If you can’t see the data, make sure the current chart view is scrolled to the area covered by the weather
data.
5. When the display of weather data is on, values of weather parameters under the mouse pointer are
displayed in the lower left corner of the chart view.
To configure the display of weather data, do the following:

1. Open the Weather ÆWeather Presentation tab. Using options from this tab, you can turn on/off the
display of weather parameters, select the type of weather symbols (point, line, area), select
measurement units that will be used to display weather parameters, set the time for the display of the
weather forecast, and turn on/off animation of the weather forecast.
Figure 123 Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab

2. To turn on the display of a specified weather parameter in the chart view, tick the checkbox to the left
from the parameter name in the Meteo Parameter column of the Meteo Parameters table. To turn the
display of the parameter off, clear the checkbox.
You can also use options presented in the Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab to turn the display of
weather parameters on/off. To do so, open the Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab and press
buttons with the names of parameters you want to display.
Figure 124 Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, weather parameters buttons
3. The data are displayed using symbols that are described in the legend for every meteorological
parameter. To open the legend of a parameter, select it in the Meteo Parameters table and press the
Legend button.
4. To select the type of symbols to be used for the display of a specified weather parameter, in the Meteo
Parameters table, tick checkboxes corresponding to the symbol types for the parameter (the Area,
Cont, Symb, or Text field).
• Area: tinting of areas
Figure 125 Display of the wind strength using the Area type symbols
• Cont: isolines
Figure 126 Display of the temperature using the Contour type symbols
• Symb: point symbols. Vector parameters such as wind are displayed using point symbols showing
the parameter strength and direction. Numeric parameters such as temperature are displayed using
the ‘X’ symbols plotted in the coordinates of the parameter readings.
Figure 127 Display of the wind strength using the Symbol type symbols
• Text: point symbols. Numeric values of parameters are plotted in the coordinates where the
parameters readings were done 41 .
Figure 128 Display of the temperature using the Text type symbols
5. To select measurement units for the display of a weather parameter, double-click or press the ENTER
key in the Measurement Units field of the weather parameter (when the legend is open, the
Measurement Units column is hidden). The drop-down list with measurement unit options will appear in
the cell. Open the drop-down list and select one of the measurement units.
41
Some symbol types cannot be used to display specific weather parameters. For example, Contour type symbols cannot
be used to display wind speed and direction or precipitation data. If a symbol type cannot be used for a weather
parameter, it is grayed for that parameter.
All symbol types available for a parameter can be used in the chart view at the same time.

Figure 129 Selecting measurement units for the wind speed

6. To set the time for which weather data should be displayed, use the time setup tool. You can find the
time setup tool both in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab and in the Weather Æ
Weather Presentation tab.
Figure 130 Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab, time tool

To set the time, enter the date and time value to the Date field and press the Go button or simply move
the slider of the time scale. Date and time in the Date field change as the slider is being moved.
To change the date and time to the current date and time value, press the Today button 42 .
7. To see the weather forecast in dynamics, use the animation buttons: – jump to the beginning of the
forecast; – one step back (set the step value in the Step drop-down list); – start/stop the forecast
animation (the forecast is played from the current position to the end); – one step forward; -- jump
to the end of the forecast 43 .
6.7.2 Display of Cyclones
Tropical cyclones data that are distributed by the World Meteorological Organization are included as a
separate weather product to the weather data distributed by Jeppesen.
IMPORTANT!
When navigating near a tropical cyclone, update cyclone data regularly and study the information very
carefully 44 .
42
Weather forecast data received from the weather server are compiled for a certain period of time (the period is
indicated in the data request). You can view the data for any time within this period.
43
Weather parameters readings were made with a certain time step. The time step for the forecast animation is set in
the Step drop-down list. The set step may differ from the actual parameter readings step. In this case weather data are
interpolated in time. To distinguish the interpolated time step from the original time step, the font type of interpolated
parameters will become italic in the Meteo Parameters window.
44
The dangerous zone is a 50 mile zone near the current cyclone position and the zones around the forecasted cyclone
positions: 100 mile zone for a 24 hour forecast, 150 mile zone for a 48 hour forecast, 200 mile zone for a 72 hour
forecast, and 250 mile zone for a 96 and more hour forecast.

To display cyclones data, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab and press the Cyclones button
or set the Tropical cyclone checkbox in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab.
2. The ECDIS will load the last loaded cyclones file. If there was no cyclone files opened or you need to
open a different file, use the Open Cyclones button: press the button, select the cyclones file in the
Open dialog and press the Open button. The cyclones data will be loaded to the ECDIS and displayed in
the chart view.
Figure 131 Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab, display of tropical cyclones
3. The cyclone observed positions are displayed with red-colored symbols ; the forecasted positions are
displayed with white-colored circles . The position of the cyclone at the time set in the time setup tool
in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab, is indicated with a yellow-colored circle .
4. When you point with the mouse pointer at one of the cyclone positions, a tool tip appears with the
cyclone name, date and time when the cyclone is expected in the position, wind speed, and wind gust
speed.
5. If there is a route going near the cyclone trajectory, the dangerous route legs will be highlighted with
purple color in the chart view, the same color will be used to indicate the dangerous time for navigating
along the route in the Weather Æ Weather Time Series tab graphs.
6.7.3 Display of Ice Situation
Ice situation data are distributed by Jeppesen Marine as an individual weather product.
IMPORTANT!
Ice situation data are based on the information received from satellites the day before the data are available
for download from the Jeppesen Marine weather server. Therefore the ice situation data can be only used as
a reference and in no way can the data be used to navigate near the ice border or in the ice-covered waters.
Ice concentration and ice coverage data are displayed in the chart view in accordance with the standards of
the WMO.
To display ice situation data, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab and tick the Ice concentration checkbox in the Meteo
Parameters table. The data will be displayed in the chart view.
Figure 132 Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab, display of the ice situation
2. The ice situation data received from satellites during one day are compiled into one time period and
provided for the download from the Jeppesen Marine weather server only the next day. That is why the
date and time in the Data field are set automatically to 12 a.m. of the previous day and cannot be
changed.
6.7.4 Weather Time Series
In the Weather Time Series panel you can see the evolution of specified weather parameters in a single
point or along a specified route.
IMPORTANT!
To create time series for a specified route, weather data currently downloaded in the ECDIS should cover
the geographical area along which the route goes. The time period of the weather forecast should cover the
time scheduled for navigating along the route (see chapter 6.4.6, Editing Route Schedule).
To create time series for a single point, do the following:

1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Point on Chart option, Figure
133.
Figure 133 Weather Æ Weather Time Series tab, time series for a point

2. Press the Locate Point on Chart button and plot a point on the chart by left-clicking in the chart view.
The point is highlighted with a yellow ring . The point coordinates are displayed in the Lat and Lon
fields of the Point on Chart section. The coordinates can be edited.
3. Select a time range of the time series on the Display drop-down list.
The range has been extended up to 2 days, Figure 133 45 .
4. Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters. To
select a parameter, tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name. To unselect a weather
parameter, clear the checkbox.
5. After the parameters have been checked, the graphs of the parameters development in time will be built
in the graph pane. The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis; vertical axes are different for each
weather parameter and represent the parameters magnitude.
6. When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane, the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the
pointer position. In the parameters list, the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right of
each parameter. The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow vertical
line.
7. To export weather data for the selected point to a *.csv file, press the Export button, indicate the file
name and folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog, and press the Save button.
8. To print the graph out, press the Print button, the graph will be automatically saved to a *.jpg file and
opened with your default image processing program. Print the graph out using the printing functionality of
the program.
To create time series for a route, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Time Series tab and select the Build for Route option. The list of all
available routes will appear in the Select Route pane below.
2. Select one of the routes in the Select Route pane.
3. Select a time step of the time series in the Step drop-down list: 1, 3, 6 and 12 Hours options are
available.
4. Select weather parameters to be used for creating the time series in the list of weather parameters. To
select a parameter, tick the checkbox to the left from the parameter name. To unselect a weather
parameter, clear the checkbox.
5. After the parameters have been checked, the graphs of the parameters development in time along the
route will be built in the graph pane. A point on a parameter graph shows the value of the parameter at a
specified time for the point on the route where the own ship is supposed to be at that time.
The horizontal axis of the graph is the time axis; vertical axes are different for each weather parameter
and represent the parameters magnitude.
6. When moving the mouse pointer in the graph pane, the tool tip is displayed with the exact time in the
pointer position. In the parameters list, the value of the parameter at that time will be shown to the right of
each parameter. The current time set in the Weather Presentation panel is indicated by a yellow vertical
line.
45
New feature in 5.0.84 program version

Display
Figure 134 Weather Æ Weather Time Series tab, time series for a route
7. To export weather data for the route to a *.csv file, press the Export button, indicate the name of the
file and the folder where the file will be saved in the Save As dialog, and press the Save button.
8. To print the graph, press the Print button, the graph will be automatically saved to a *.jpg file and
opened with your default image processing program. Print the graph out using the printing functionality of
the program.
6.7.5 Weather Alarm Area
In the Weather Æ Weather Alarm Area tab you can set alarm thresholds for weather forecast parameters
and the ECDIS will display areas where values of parameters exceed the set thresholds as alarm areas on
the chart.
To set a weather alarm condition, do the following:
1. Open the Weather Æ Weather Alarm Area tab and press the Add condition button to create a new line
in the alarms table.
2. Double-click in the Met Parameter field to open the drop-down list with weather parameters. Select a
parameter from the drop-down list.
Figure 135 Weather Æ Weather Alarm Area tab, adding a new alarm condition
3. Double-click in the Value of field to open the drop-down list of attributes of the specified weather
parameter. Select an attribute from the drop-down list.
4. Double-click in the Value from field and enter the value of the lower limit of the condition; double-click in
the Value to field and enter the value of the upper limit.
5. Repeat the actions for other alarm conditions if necessary. To combine several alarm conditions, use
operations available in the Operation drop-down list. The drop-down list appears after the next alarm
condition has been added. The following operations are available:
• AND – alarm area will be made for areas where both conditions are true
• OR – alarm area will be made for areas where at least one of the conditions is true
6. To delete a condition select it in the table and press the Delete button. To delete all conditions from the
table press the Delete All button.

7. To move a condition up or down in the table, select it and press the Move up or Move down button
respectively.
8. To save the current conditions set to a file press the Save button, in the Save as dialog indicate the
folder and the name of the conditions file and press Save. The conditions set will be saved to an *.xml
file. To load a previously saved conditions set press the Load button, in the Open dialog select the file
with the conditions and press Open. The conditions will be loaded and displayed in the Weather Alarm
Area panel.
To display alarm areas in the chart view, do the following:
1. Open the Weather ÆWeather Presentation tab.
2. Find the Alarm zone entry in the Meteo Parameter column and tick the checkbox to the left from the
entry.
6.7.6 Comparison of Routes
Alarm areas can be used to compare two routes and select the one which is safer.
To compare routes, do the following:
1. Create two or more routes (see chapter 6.4, Route Planning and Plotting). Display the routes in the chart
view.
2. Download weather data for the region covering the routes. It is important that the time period of the
weather forecast cover the time scheduled for navigating along the routes.
3. Set alarm conditions in the Weather Æ Weather Alarm Area tab (see chapter 6.7.5, Weather Alarm
Area). The routes will be colored depending on whether they go inside or outside the alarm areas.
4. In the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab, in the time setup tool, set the time scheduled for
navigation along the route. A symbol of the own ship will appear on the route in the position where the
ship is supposed to be at the indicated time (if there are several routes displayed in the chart view, the
symbol of the own ship will appear on all the routes). Weather forecast parameters will be displayed for
the indicated time.
The legs of the routes will be highlighted with red if they are dangerous in terms of the alarm conditions;
green if the legs are safe; and blue of there is a danger of capsizing for the ship following under given
weather conditions and with the planned speed along the legs.
5. The navigation along the routes is imitated by dragging the own ship symbol from one waypoint to
another using the mouse pointer. When the ship symbol is moved, the time changes to the time at which
the ship is scheduled to reach the new position. The weather forecast changes together with the time.
The own ship symbols on other routes are moved too.
When dragged along the route, the own ship symbol can be moved for a distance the ship would make in
the time interval set in the Step field in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab. To move the own
ship symbol along the route, you can also use the animation buttons of the time setup tool.

Figure 136 Weather Æ Weather Time Series tab, routes comparison

6.7.7 Inspect Ship Position
The Inspect Ship Position function allows assessing a specified position of your ship on the route in terms
of weather conditions. To assess a ship position you need the time of weather forecast to be the same as the
time at which the vessel will reach the specified position (route schedule).
To assess the ship position on the route, do the following:
1. Display a route in the chart view.
2. Download weather data for the region covering the route (see chapter 6.6, Weather Forecast:
Download).
3. Make sure that the time period of the weather forecast covers the time scheduled for navigating along
the route.
4. Set the own ship parameters in the Ship Response dialog. To open the dialog, in the Weather Æ
Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Ship Response Options button (details about the
Ship Response Options dialog see below).
5. Set the time of the weather forecast display in the time setup tool of the Weather Æ Weather
Presentation (Easy Mode) tab. The time should be within the period of time scheduled for navigating
along the route (Route Æ Route Planning tab, edit mode, Schedule table). The own ship symbol will
appear on the route at the position where the own ship is supposed to be at the indicated time (the
position is calculated using the route schedule data and the own ship planned speed).
To change time schedule of the route go to the Route Æ Route Planning panel, select the route you
intend to check in the Routes table, switch to the edit mode (the Edit button), and in the Schedule tab
change the ETD (estimated time of departure) value so that the time period scheduled for navigating
along the route overlapped with the time period for which you have weather data. Once this done, a ship
symbol will appear on the route. Now you can view the results of operation of the Inspect Ship Position
function.
6. If there are several routes and the time set in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab for the weather
forecast display falls within the time period scheduled for navigating on the routes, the own ship symbol
will appear on these routes too. To select an own ship symbol, left-click on it. The active own ship symbol
will become red.

Figure 137 Non- Figure 138 Selected

selected own ship own ship symbol
symbol
7. Open the Inspect Ship Position panel where the result of the analysis of the current own ship position
for the weather conditions at the given time is displayed. To open the Inspect Ship Position panel,
press the Inspect Ship Pos button in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab.
8. To change the time for the evaluation of the own ship position, move the time slider of the time setup tool
in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab or drag the own ship symbol along the route
(left-click on the symbol and, holding the mouse button). Time can be changed by the step set in the
Step field in the time setup tool in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab.
¾ To read the Inspect Ship Position panel, you need the following information:
1. The Inspect Ship Position panel consists of two parts: the informational part and the polar diagram part.
2. In the informational part you can see the following data:
• Date and time of the ship position – in the upper part of the
panel.
• Coordinates of the ship position – in the upper part of the panel.
• Roll, pitch and heave values (estimated using the swell and total
waves data) – in the lower part, the left column.
• Weather parameters (values of those weather parameters are
displayed that are checked in the Weather Æ Weather
Presentation tab in the Meteo. Parameters table).
• You can also see presentation of such weather parameters as
total sea, swell and wind as special symbols. The parameters
are represented as colored arrows in three corners of the panel:
− The dark blue arrow in the upper left corner represents the
direction and period of total sea.
− The blue arrow in the lower left corner represents the Figure 139 Inspect Ship
direction and the period of the swell. Position panel
− The red arrow in the upper right corner represents the direction and velocity of the wind.
To read values of the weather parameters represented by the arrows, see corresponding weather
legends in the Weather Æ Weather Presentation tab (to open a weather legend relating to a
weather parameter, select the weather parameter in the Meteo. Parameters table and the
corresponding weather legend will be displayed in the Weather Legend part of the tab).
3. The polar diagram gives you information about the speed and course of the vessel in a specified position
on the route as well as about the speed and course values combinations that can cause a risk of a
sudden increase in roll amplitude. The diagram consists of the following elements:
• Concentric circular axes representing vessel speed.
• The vessel symbol plotted in the middle of the diagram.
• The vessel speed and direction vector (the arrow pointing outward from the center of the vessel
symbol) shows the direction and velocity of the vessel. The direction is the angle between the
imaginary vertical axis of the diagram and the vessel speed and direction vector measured
horizontally from North to whatever direction you are pointing. The vessel speed is defined with the
help of concentric axes representing speed – the value of the speed lies in the point where the
vector ends. Speed of the vessel in the current position is taken from the route characteristics
(speed on the leg).

• The Danger (red shadow) zone covers all points representing combination of speed and course at
which there is a danger of having a sudden increase in roll amplitude of the vessel (if the vessel
speed and direction vector end lies within the red shadow zone, the vessel is in danger of
capsizing). The conclusion is made from comparison of the vessel natural roll period with the
relative wave period: if the difference between values is less than 30% the resonance can occur.
This combination can in some cases be dangerous. An alarm for a given threshold of roll amplitude
can be made in the Weather Alarm Area panel 46 .
To set ship parameters for the Ship Response analysis, do the following:
1. In the Weather Æ Weather Presentation (Easy Mode) tab, press the Ship Response Options
button. The Ship Response dialog will open.
Figure 140 Ship Response window

2. Set the required parameters:
• Ship Data section
− Length – Length at waterline (LWL) of the vessel, meters. LWL is the length of the vessel as
measured from the bow ending of the waterline to the stern ending.
− Width – Beam (the widest width) of the vessel, meters.
− Draft – Draft of the vessel, meters.
− Load Displacement – Displacement of the vessel, tons.
• Additional parameters section
− Angle of vanishing stability – Sets angle of vanishing stability (AVS) of the vessel, degrees.
AVS is the angle the boat can heel and still right itself.
− Waterline area coefficient – Waterline area coefficient, non-dimensional quantity.
− Effective waterline area – Effective waterline area, square meters.
− Transverse metacentric height – Transverse metacentric height of the vessel, meters.
Transverse metacentric height is the vertical separation of the center of gravity and the
transverse metacenter.
3. Check the Enable ship response calculation checkbox so that the Danger zone was calculated and
displayed in the Inspect Ship Position panel.
4. Check the Show alarm of resonance condition checkbox to enable the alarm in case a resonance
condition occurs during navigation along the route.
5. You can save a set of parameters to a file in order to use them later. To save parameters press the Save
button, in the Save as dialog indicate the location and name of the file and press Save. The set of ship
response parameters will be saved to an *.xml file.
6. To load previously saved sets of parameters press the Load button, in the Open dialog select the file
with parameters and press Open. The parameters will be loaded and displayed in the corresponding
fields of the Ship Response window.
46
The Inspect Ship Position function operates with specific ship dimensions and other parameters. The parameters
are set using the Ship Response Options setup tool.

7. To save changed parameters and close the Ship Response window, press OK. To close the window
without saving changes press Cancel.
6.8 Piracy Information
Use information about pirate assaults to plpan your route. Piracy information is now available in ECDIS as a
database supplementary section.
¾ The piracy information section provides the following data 47 :

• name, type and flag state of assaulted vessels
• date and location of incidents
• description of incidents
• URL of the internet site providing additional information about incidents
• note on the latest piracy incidents
To access the Piracy Information supplementary section, you have to install a license for the data. A piracy
information license is installed the same way as a data set or area license. Licenses are installed in the Data
Æ Licensing tab. For more details, see chapter 4.2, Licensing Data.
After the license has been installed, turn on the display of the Piracy Information supplementary section. Go
to the Chart Æ Chart Settings tab, select the current database in the Supplementary Chart Info section
and check the Piracy Information data section. For more details, see chapter 5.6.3, Supplementary Data.
There are two types of piracy information objects: a point Piracy Attempt object (a skull and cross bones
symbol ) and an area Piracy Note object. To get information about a piracy object, right-click it and find
the object in the Object Information tab that will open 48 .
¾ The following types of Piracy Attempt objects exist:
• Hijack – marked with a red skull and cross bones symbol
• Armed robbery/Armed assault – marked with an orange skull and cross bones symbol
• Attempted boarding – marked with a blue skull and cross bones symbol
• Suspicious approach – marked with a green skull and cross bones symbol
47
The Piracy Information supplementary section requires separate licensing.
48
To select a Piracy Attempt object place the mouse pointer exactly in the point where bones cross.

7. NAVIGATION
7.1 Own Ship Position and Passed Track
Position of the own ship can be monitored in the chart view. The own ship symbol is displayed in the chart
view in coordinates coming from the primary position source.
The elements of the own ship presentation in the chart view include the own ship symbol, the prediction
vector, and the passed track.
Figure 141 Own ship position and vectors, and passed track presentation
To configure the display of the own ship in the chart view, do the following:
1. Set the primary and secondary position sources in the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, the Position
Source section (see chapter 7.2, Position Sources).
2. Open the Navi Æ Own Ship past track and vector tab. In this tab you can configure the display of the
own ship passed track and prediction vectors.
Figure 142 Config Æ System tab, Own Ship tab

3. To start drawing the own ship passed track, the track based on positioning data from the primary position
source, tick the Past track checkbox in the Past track section. The passed track will be displayed in the
chart view. The passed track is updated at the interval set in the Display every field. To set an interval,
select a value in the Display every drop-down list.
4. To hide the passed track, clear the Past track checkbox. The passed track is removed from the display
but is not deleted. To display the hidden passed track again, check the Past track checkbox.
5. To delete the old passed track and start drawing the new passed track, check the Past track checkbox
and press the Reset button. The old passed track will be deleted and the new one will start to be drawn.
6. To delete the passed track and stop drawing the passed track altogether, clear the Past track checkbox
and press the Reset button. The old passed track will be deleted.

7. You can also display the own ship secondary passed track, the track based on positioning data from the
secondary positioning device. Settings for the secondary passed track are presented in the Secondary
past track section and are the same as the settings for the primary position source passed track.
8. To turn on the display of time labels on the own ship passed track, check the Time labels checkbox in
the Past track section. To turn the display of time labels off, clear the Time labels checkbox. Time
labels are displayed with the step the same as the own ship vector length.
9. In the Own ship vector section you can configure properties of the ship velocity vectors. To predict the
ship position over a period of time three vectors are used:
• Ground stabilized vector – vector based on SOG (speed over ground) and COG (course over
ground) values (the black dotted line with one minute graduation
marks and a double arrow end). To display this vector, check the
Ground stabilized vector checkbox.
• Water stabilized vector – vector based on STW (speed through
water) and HDG (heading) values (the black dotted line with no
graduation marks and a single arrow end). To display this vector,
check the Water stabilized vector checkbox. Figure 143 Velocity vectors
• Prediction vector – vector based on STW, HDG and ROT (rate of
turn) values (the red line with a single arrow end). To display this vector, check the Prediction
vector checkbox.
To set the time period for the ship position prediction, select a value from the Vector length drop-down
list. (e.g. if it is set to 6 minutes, the vector length will show how far the vessel will get in 6 minutes with
the current speed).
10. To be able to evaluate the ability of the own ship to pass a narrow place (through a lock, under a bridge,
etc.), the Sight lines function is used. The Sight lines function turns on the display of the passage
corridor of the own ship. You can see the passage corridor at the chart
scale at which the own ship symbol is shown as a scaled area symbol
and larger. If the own ship symbol is shown as a point symbol, the ship
passage corridor is not displayed.
The width of the passage corridor depends on the course over the
ground (COG) and heading (HDG) of the ship. If the COG and HDG
values are the same, the width of the own ship passage corridor
equals the maximum beam of the ship set in the Config Æ Own Ship
tab. If the COG and the HDG values are different the width of the own
ship passage corridor is more than the maximum beam. The width of
the own ship passage corridor is shown on the chart near the end of Figure 144 Own ship
49
the passage corridor symbol . passage corridor
(Beam=10m, Length=40m)
To display the own ship symbol using the secondary position source, do
the following:
Open the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab and check the Show secondary checkbox in the Position Source
section.
To display the own ship symbol as a scaled area symbol, do the following:
1. Open the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab and check the True scale ship image checkbox.
2. The own ship point symbol will turn into an area symbol at large scales. The scale at which the
transformation happens depends on overall dimensions of the own ship set in the Config Æ Own Ship
Æ Own ship setup tab.
49
If any of the prediction vectors is not displayed, make sure that the required data (SOG, COG, STW, HDG, ROT) are
coming to the ECDIS from input devices.

7.2 Position Sources

7.2.1 Primary and Secondary Position Sources
In the ECDIS, you can use two ways to position the own ship:
• One or more GPS devices (DGPS, WAAS/EGNOS, etc.), compatible with the NMEA interface. GPS
devices used for positioning should be registered in the ECDIS (see chapter 3.1, Input/Output).
• Dead reckoning (see chapter 7.2.2, Dead Reckoning).
Several positioning devices can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time. One of the devices is used as
a primary position source and one as a secondary position source. Both the own ship position defined with
the primary positioning device and that defined with the secondary positioning device can be displayed in the
chart view (see chapter 7.1, Own Ship Position and Passed Track). Using the display of both primary and
secondary positions of the own ship, you can monitor the reliability of various positioning devices.
To set a positioning device as a primary or a secondary position source, do the following:
Make sure that the positioning device you want to set as a primary or secondary position source is
connected to the ECIDS and registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab (see chapter 3.1, Input/Output).
1. Open the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab. Position sources are configured in the Position sources tab. All
positioning devices that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the Secondary
position source drop-down list, dead reckoning (DR) is also on the list though it is not an external input
device.
Figure 145 Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, Position Source section

2. You can also set position sources in the Position, Heading and Data sources panel. To open the panel
left-click on the Position Source indicator. Open the Position sources tab. This tab is the same as the
Position sources tab in the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, and all actions in one are immediately
repeated in the other.
Figure 146 Position sources tab

3. In case the positioning device you want to set as a primary position source is already set so, there is no
need to change anything. If the positioning device is not set as a primary position source, select it in the

Secondary position source drop-down list and press the Swap position sources button. The name of
the primary position source is displayed in the Position Source indicator (see chapter 2.3, Indicators
Panel) 50 .
4. To set a positioning device as a secondary position source, just select it in the list of available positioning
devices in the Position sources tab. To display the own ship position in the chart view using the
secondary position source, check the Show secondary checkbox.
5. In case the primary position source fails, an alarm is triggered (see chapter 7.6, Alarms) and the
secondary position source becomes the primary source automatically.
7.2.2 Dead Reckoning
The dead reckoning parameters can be used for the own ship positioning when communication with all other
positioning devices is lost.
To use dead reckoning as position source, do the following:
1. Open the Navi Æ Dead reckoning tab. The Position, Heading, and Speed parameters are
automatically set to the values that were last received from external output devices.
Figure 147 Config Æ Dead reckoning tab

2. To change the automatically set parameters, clear the Auto/Manual checkbox of the parameter that you
are going to change and enter a new value to the edit field.
3. Enter the drift direction and speed to the Drift direction and Drift speed fields.
4. After all necessary changes have been done, press the Apply button for the parameters to take effect.
7.2.3 Manual Position Fix by Range and Bearing LOPs
The Manual Position Fix function is intended for fixing of the own ship position using range and bearing lines
of position taken from visual or radar detected reference objects. Description of the function algorithm and
examples of the manual position task are presented in the Appendix D.
To use the Manual Position Fix function, open the Navi Æ LOP Position fix tab.
Figure 148 Navi Æ LOP Position fix tab
50
The DR cannot be set as a primary position source this way. It is used for positioning only in case there is no any data
available from external positioning devices.

¾ To complete the manual position fix task, the following operations should be performed:
1. Plotting reference points in the chart view.
2. Entering results of measuring bearings and ranges to the reference objects.
3. Calculating the position.
4. Accepting the calculated position as the new own ship position.
5. Additional parameters configuration is available: corrections for constant errors of measuring devices.
To plot reference points in the chart view, do the following:
1. Press the Select reference point button to switch to the object selection mode.
2. In the chart view, point the mouse pointer at the observed object and right-click on it. The window with
the list of all objects under the pointer will open 51 .
3. In the objects list find the observed object and double-click on it to select. The Would you like to name
the reference point? window will open where you can enter the reference point name 52 .
Figure 149 List of objects under the mouse pointer

4. Enter the reference point name in the Would you like to name the observation point? field and press
the OK button. You may leave the point without a name, just press the OK button and press Yes in the
You did not give a name to the reference point. Would you like to proceed anyway? message window.
5. The reference point will be added to the Reference points list and a reference point symbol
will be displayed in the chart view.
6. The point coordinates are displayed in the Position fields below the Observation table. To change the
reference point position, type in new coordinate values and press the Change button. The reference
point will be moved to the new coordinates.
7. In the Reference points list, you can move points up and down: select a point and press the Up button
to move the point up in the list or Down button to move the point down in the list. To remove a point,
select it in the list and press the Remove button. To remove all points, press the Remove All button.
Figure 150 Navi Æ Manual Observation tab, Observation Points list
51
Reference point plotting is only possible if the Navi Æ Manual Observation tab is open and the Select reference
point button is pressed. If any other or no tab is open, right-clicking in the chart view opens the Object Info panel.
52
If the reference point is a point on land, select the Land area or the Coastline object, and the reference point symbol
will be plotted in the position of the mouse pointer on the land or at the coast line.

To enter observation results, do the following:
1. The observation data are entered to the Observation table. To enter the data for a reference point,
select the point in the Reference points list. Now you can start entering distance and bearing data to the
Observation table.
Figure 151 Navi Æ LOP Position fix tab, entering observation data
2. To enter the distance to the observed point, double-click in the Distance field to make the field editable
and enter the distance value. The measurement units are set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab.
3. To enter the bearing from the own ship to the point, double-click in the Bearing field to make it editable
and enter the bearing value.
4. To set the observation time, double-click in the Fix time field: the current time will be displayed. Correct
the time value so that it corresponded to the observation time if necessary 53 .
5. To specify the device used to make the observation, double-click in the Tool field to make it editable and
select the device from the devices drop-down list. Depending on the specified device the error correction
for the device is used in the position calculation 54 .
6. To add an additional observation for a reference point, select the point in the Reference points list and
press the Add button to the right from the Observation table: a new observation line will be added to the
table. You can enter observation data to the new line.
7. To remove an observation, select it in the Observation table and press the Remove button to the right
from the table.
8. After the observation data have been entered, the line of position (LOP) built using the data is plotted in
the chart view with the time of observation displayed on the line. LOP’s with different observation time
are advanced to the time of the latest observed LOP. When advancing a LOP, the own ship course
changes, speed changes, and set and drift between the two lines are accounted for. Advanced LOP’s
are marked with a TPL mark.
Figure 152 LOP: Figure 153 LOP: Figure 154 LOP:

Range Arc Bearing Line advanced bearing line
53
If the time is not set, position calculation is impossible. The Calculate button remains dimmed.
54
The type of position fix you are using defines which fields of the observation entry should be filled. For example, for a
fix by bearings, Bearing, Fix time, and Tool fields should be filled; and for a fix by ranges, only Distance, Fix time,
and Tool fields should be filled.

To calculate the observed position, do the following:
1. To calculate the own ship position, press the Calculate button. The position will be calculated and
plotted in the chart view as a symbol. The position coordinates and the position offset from the
current DR position of the own ship are displayed in the Result pane of the Navi Æ LOP Position fix
tab.
Figure 155 Calculated position in the chart view and in the Result section
2. The coordinates of the manual position fix are displayed in the Position section of the Result pane. The
Discrepancy pane displays offset of the manual position fix from the current DR position of the own ship:
distance from the own ship to the manual fix in the Distance field, bearing from the own ship to the
manual fix in the Bearing field, and the root mean square error of the position fix in the RMS field. The
RMS error is displayed in the chart view as an RMS error ellipse.
Figure 156 RMS error ellipse

To accept the observed position, do the following:
1. To accept the position fix as a new DR position of the own ship, press the Accept Position button. The
own ship symbol will be moved to the fix and the DR will resume positioning of the own ship from the fix.
If the dead reckoning is off, the own ship is not moved to the manual fix.
2. After the manual fix has been accepted, the manual fix symbol is displayed in the chart view with the time
and means of observation:
• V – the fix was made using visual bearings
• R – the fix was made using radar ranges
• VR – the fix was made using both visual bearings and radar ranges

3. At the moment when the manual fix is accepted, an entry about it is added to the logbook. The manual fix
entry may look as follows 55 :
Figure 157 Log Book panel, manual fix entries

To configure additional manual position fix parameters, do the following:
1. Open the MODevices.config.xml file where you can enter values of RMS and fixed corrections for
observation devices. To do so, open the Config Æ Own ship Æ Position of instruments tab and press
the Advanced button. The ‘Editing of LOP Position fix function advanced parameters. Do you wish to
continue?’ message will appear. Press the YES button, the MODevices.config.xml file will be
opened for editing in the LOP Position fix advanced parameters window.
2. Edit the file directly in the window. To save the changes, press the Save button; to reset the file to its
initial contents, press the Reset button. To close the window, press the Close button
Figure 158 LOP Position fix advanced parameters window
55
Before the start of a new manual position fix operation, clear all previous observations (only if the observations are
not to be used in this operation). To do so, press the Remove All button to the right from the Observations table.

3. To edit the LOP Position fix advanced parameters, enter new values to the <value> fields of
appropriate settings without changing the structure of the MODevices.config.xml file. In the table
below sections and settings of the file are described:
Section Setting Default Description

Value
DRActualisation SogRMS 0.1 Speed over ground root mean square error
(RMSE), in knots.
For example, if your speed over ground RMSE is
0.2 knots, set the SogRMS value to 0.2.
Radar BrgRMS 0.3 Radar bearing RMSE, in degrees.

For example, if your radar bearing RMSE is 0.5
degrees, set the BrgRMS value to 0.5.
BrgCorrection 0.0 Radar bearing constant correction, in degrees.

If the radar bearing line deviates anticlockwise,
the correction should be positive; if the bearing
line deviates clockwise the correction should be
negative.
For example, if your radar bearing is 0.5 degrees
wrong clockwise, set the BrgCorrection value
to -0.5.
DistRMS 3.75 Radar distance RMSE, in nautical miles.

For example, if your radar distance RMSE is 4.5
nautical miles, set the DistRMS value to 4.5.
DistCorrection 0.0 Radar distance constant correction, in nautical

miles.
If the radar defined range exceeds the true range
value, the correction should be negative; if the
radar defined range falls behind the true range
value, the correction should be positive.
For example, if your radar defined ranges exceed
true range values by 0.2 nautical miles, set the
DistCorrection value to 0.2.
DirFinder 1 BrgRMS 0.1 Port direction finder bearing RMSE, in degrees.

For example, if your port direction finder bearing
RMSE is 0.5 degrees, set the BrgRMS value to
0.5.
BrgCorrection 0.0 Port direction finder bearing constant correction,

in degrees.
If the port direction finder dial is constantly turned
anticlockwise, the correction should bе positive; if
the dial is turned clockwise, the correction should
be negative.
For example, if your port direction finder dial is
turned to 0.3 degrees anticlockwise, set the
BrgCorrection value to 0.3.

Section Setting Default Description

Value
DirFinder 2 BrgRMS 0.1 Starboard direction finder bearing RMSE, in

degrees.
For example, if your starboard direction finder
bearing RMSE is 0.5 degrees, set the BrgRMS
value to 0.5.
BrgCorrection 0.0 Starboard direction finder bearing constant

correction, in degrees.
If the starboard direction finder dial is constantly
turned anticlockwise, the correction should bе
positive; if the dial is turned clockwise, the
correction should be negative.
For example, if your starboard direction finder
dial is turned to 0.3 degrees anticlockwise, set
the BrgCorrection value to 0.3.
4. After the file has been edited, save it (press the Save button) and close it (press the Close button).
7.2.4 Position Correction
In case the currently used positioning device provides coordinates in a coordinates system different from the
chart coordinates system, a position correction is required. For example, the positioning device provides
coordinates in the S-42 coordinates system (for plotting the own ship on a paper chart), and the electronic
chart is made in the WGS-84 coordinates systems (usually all digital charts are made in the WGS-84
system): in this case, the own ship position in the chart view is incorrect. A coordinates correction should be
provided to the ECDIS to display the own ship symbol in the correct position.
The coordinates system of the positioning device is set in the device itself; the electronic chart coordinates
system is displayed in the navigational panel (see chapter 7.7.2, Route Monitoring Panel).
If the positioning device and the chart have different coordinates systems, a position correction should be
introduced.
IMPORTANT!
The position correction is only available to system administrators and is protected with a password.
To introduce a position correction, do the following:

1. Open the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab. The position correction values are
entered in the Position Corrections section.
2. Enter the correction for the latitude to the Lat field and the correction for the
longitude to the Lon field. To add the correction value to the coordinate, enter
the plus ‘+’ sign in front of the value; to subtract the correction value, enter
the minus ‘-’ sign in front of the value.
Figure 159 Position
3. After the correction has been entered or changed, press Apply corrections. Correction section
4. The corrections are applied to the coordinates received from the positioning
device and displayed in the navigational panel. The corrections are indicated with the plus ‘+’ and minus
‘-’ signs depending on the sign of the correction 56 .
56
Positioning devices can transmit the DTM sentence in the NMEA format. This sentence contains indication of the
coordinates system of the device. In this case check the DTM sentence checkbox when registering the device in the
ECDIS. With the DTM sentence, the ECDIS receives the position correction automatically and you don’t have to enter it
manually.

7.2.5 Position Discrepancies
When the own ship position is defined using more than one method, there can be
discrepancies between position values. The discrepancies are displayed in the
Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, Position discrepancies section:
• Primary/Secondary – discrepancy between positions coming from
primary and secondary position sources (displayed if the Show Figure 160 Position
secondary checkbox in the Navi Æ Navigation Data Æ Position discrepancies
sources tab is checked);
• Primary/Manual – discrepancy between positions defined by primary position source and by
manual observation (LOP position fix).
7.3 Heading Sources
In the ECDIS, you can use two ways to get the own ship heading:
• One or more external devices providing heading information, compatible with the NMEA interface.
The devices should be registered in the ECDIS.
• Dead reckoning (see chapter 7.2.2, Dead Reckoning).
Several devices providing the own ship heading data can be connected to the ECDIS at the same time. One
of the devices is used as a primary heading source and one as a secondary heading source.
To set a device as a primary or a secondary heading source, do the following:
1. Make sure that the device you want to set as a primary or secondary heading source is connected to the
ECIDS and registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab.
2. Open the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab. Heading sources are configured in the Heading sources
section. All devices providing heading that are connected to and registered in the ECDIS are listed in the
available heading devices list, dead reckoning (DR) is also on the list though it is not an external input
device.
Figure 161 Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, Position Source section

3. You can also set heading sources in the Position, Heading and Data sources panel. To open the panel
left-click on the Position Source indicator. Open the Heading sources tab. This tab is the same as the
Heading sources tab in the Navi Æ Navigation Data, and all actions in one are immediately repeated
in the other.

Figure 162 Heading sources tab

4. In case the device you want to set as a primary heading source is already set so, there is no need to
change anything. If this device is not set as a primary position source, select it in the Secondary
heading source drop-down list of available devices and press the Swap heading sources button. The
name of the primary heading source is displayed in the heading line of the Navigational panel 57 .
5. To set a device as a secondary heading source, just select it in the Secondary heading source drop-
down list in the Heading sources tab.
6. In case the primary heading source fails, an alarm is triggered (see chapter 7.6, Alarms) and the
secondary heading source becomes the primary source automatically.
7.4 Navigational Data Display and Sources
7.4.1 Navigational Panel
Information about the own ship position, current speed and course and other navigational data coming from
external devices registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab, is displayed in the Navigational panel in the
upper right corner of the screen.
¾ In the Navigational panel, the following data are displayed:

• SHIP – The local (ship) time and date. To display the UTC time, left-
click on the date and time line and hold the mouse button. When the
button is released, the local time is displayed again. The offset
between the local and the UTC time is set in the Config Æ Units and
Time tab.
• Position source indicator – The position source indicator shows
which position source is being currently used to define the own ship
position (see chapter 7.2, Position Sources). If the primary position
source is used, the indicator is green; if the secondary position source
is used, the indicator is orange. In the brackets near the device name
reference position is indicated (CCRP – conning station; POS – the
positioning device itself).
• Own ship coordinates – Latitude and longitude of the own ship
received from the positioning device. The AUTO mark near the
coordinates indicates that the position is received from an external Figure 163
positioning device. Navigational panel
• SOG – Speed over ground received from the positioning device.
• COG – Course over ground received from the positioning device.
57
The DR cannot be set as a primary heading source this way. It is used as a heading source only in case there is no
any data available from external devices.

• HDG – Heading received from the gyrocompass. Near the heading value the name of the device
providing heading info is indicated. If heading is received from dead reckoning, the MAN mark is
displayed.
• STW – Speed through water received from the log.
• DPT – Depth received from the echo sounder. The first value is the depth from the transducer to the
sea bottom and the second value is the depth from the water line to the transducer. The DPT line is
not on the panel if no echo sounder is registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab.
• Wind – Wind speed and direction received from the wind sensor. The Wind line is not on the panel
if no wind sensor is registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab. The Disp. button opens the
Anemometer window where the true and relative wind directions are depicted graphically.
• ROT – Rate of turn received from the gyrocompass. The ROT line is not on the panel if no
gyrocompass is registered in the Config Æ Input/Output tab.
• 5951 – WGS 84 – The number of the source chart for the chart under the own ship or under the
chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage and the chart coordinates system. In the frame
lower, the suitability indicator is displayed. The indicator shows if the chart under the own ship (or
under the chart view center if the own ship is out of coverage) is suitable for navigation.
The indicators color means the following:
• Green – the values are received from the primary positioning device and other
external devices;
• Orange – the values are received from the secondary positioning device.
• Red – the external device providing the data fails and no data is coming to the
ECDIS.
7.4.2 Navigational Data Sources
The same navigational data can come from various external devices. In ECDIS
only one source of data can be used.
To view navigational data sources, do the following:
1. Left-click on the Position Source indicator in the Navigational panel. The
Position, Heading and Data sources panel will open.
2. Open the Data sources tab. The list with navigational data in the left column
and their sources in the right is displayed in the tab.
3. To close the panel, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the
panel. Figure 164 Position
7.4.3 Wind Sensor Data and Data sources
panel, Data sources
tab
If a wind sensor is connected to the system and registered in it, a Wind entry is displayed in the
Navigational panel. In the entry data coming from the wind sensor are displayed. Wind direction can also be
presented in a graphical form.
To view the graphical representation of the wind direction, do the following:
1. Press the Disp. button in the Wind entry of the Navigational panel. The Anemometer window will open.
In the window you can see the true and relative wind direction display.
2. To switch to the true wind direction display, press the True button.

3. To switch to the Relative wind direction display, press the Relative button.
Figure 165 Anemometer, true wind Figure 166 Anemometer, relative wind
(STW=10kn, HDG=0°, relative wind speed=5kn, relative wind direction=225°)
4. To drag the Anemometer window to a different position, move the pointer to the title bar, press the left
mouse button and drag the window to a new position holding the button.
5. To close the window, press the Close button in the upper right corner of the window 58 .
7.5 Navigational Chart Settings
7.5.1 Navigation Mode
When in the navigation mode, the ECDIS monitors the own ship position and moves the chart so that the
own ship stayed in the chart view.
The navigation mode status is indicated with the Navigation mode indicator (see chapter 2.3, Indicators
Panel): when the navigation mode is on, the indicator is green, when the navigation mode is off, the indicator
is orange.
To turn the navigation mode on/off, do the following:
1. To turn the navigation mode on, left-click on the Navigation mode indicator. The indicator should
become green . The chart view is scrolled so that to display the own ship symbol in the chart
view.
2. To turn the navigation mode off, left-click on the Navigation mode indicator. The indicator should
become orange . The navigation mode turns off if you left-click in the chart view while the
navigation mode is on.
7.5.2 Best Scale Mode
When in the best scale mode, the ECDIS displays the chart with the largest scale existing for the given
region. The best scale mode works only together with the navigation mode.
To turn the best scale mode on/off, do the following:
1. To turn the best scale mode on, left-click on the Scale state indicator (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel).
The indicator should become green and the indicator label should change to the Best scale; in the chart
view the chart with the best scale will be displayed.
2. You can also turn the best scale mode on by ticking the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and
Quick Access Buttons panel.
3. To turn the best scale mode off, left-click on the Scale state indicator. The indicator should become
orange.
4. You can also turn the best scale mode off by clearing the Best Scale checkbox on the Chart Scale and
Quick Access Buttons panel.
58
The true wind is wind relative to a fixed point on the earth.
The relative or apparent wind is the speed and true direction from which the wind appears to blow with reference to a
moving point.

7.5.3 Chart Display Palettes
The ECDIS implements three color palettes. The palettes are set to provide better conditions for viewing
charts under various illumination conditions. The palettes are:
Figure 167 Day palette Figure 168 Dusk palette Figure 169 Night palette
To set one of the palettes, do the following:

1. Open the Config Æ System tab.
Figure 170 Config Æ System tab, Display palettes

2. In the Display palettes section, select one of the palettes. The selected palette will be applied to the
chart view immediately 59 .
7.5.4 Chart Orientation
The chart view can be oriented to the true North up, to the own ship course up, or to the route up.
To set the chart view orientation, do the following:
1. Open the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab.
2. In the Chart Orientation section select one of the four orientation options:
a. To orient the chart to the North up, press the North Up button. The chart
will be oriented to the North up. This option is available in all modes.
b. To orient the chart to the own ship course up, press the Course Up button.
The chart will be oriented to the own ship course up. This option is only
available if the Navigation mode is on. Figure 171 Navi Æ
c. To orient the chart to the own ship heading up, press the Heading Up Navigation Data
button. The chart will be oriented to the own ship heading up. This option is tab, Chart
only available if the Navigation mode is on. Orientation section
d. To orient the chart to the route up, press the Route Up button. The chart will be oriented to the
route which is being monitored. This option is only available is the Route Monitoring mode is on.
59
To switch between the night and the day palettes, press the F12 key.

7.5.5 True and Relative Motion
There are two motion modes for the chart display: true motion mode and relative motion mode. In the true
motion mode, the own ship symbol moves across the chart view and the chart stays in the same position. As
soon as the own ship reaches a predefined distance from the chart view center, the chart is redrawn and the
ship symbol is moved to the initial position in the chart view.
In the relative motion mode, the own ship symbol stays in the same position in the chart view, and the chart
moves as the own ship position changes 60 .
To turn on and setup the true motion mode, do the following:
1. In the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, press the True button in the Ship motion
mode section. In the true motion mode the chart is stationary and the own ship
symbol is moving. When the ship reaches a pre-defined point inside the chart
view, it "jumps" backwards and the chart is redrawn.
The own ship redraw area in the True motion mode is defined automatically. Figure 172 Navi Æ
However, you can set your own ship redraw area using the Ship Redraw Area Navigation Data tab,
function. Ship Motion Mode
section
2. To set a new ship redraw area, press the Set button in the Ship Redraw Area
section. An initial pre-defined redraw area will appear in the chart view. The
area is indicated with a green internal and a red external boundary circles.
3. The red boundary is the boundary where the ship will appear each time the
screen is redrawn. To configure the external red boundary, use the upper slider
in the Ship Redraw Area section.
4. The green boundary is the internal limit of the ship redraw area. When the ship
reaches the boundary, the screen is redrawn and the ship is brought back to the Figure 173 Navi Æ
external boundary. To configure the internal green boundary, use the lower Navigation data tab,
slider in the Ship Redraw Area section. Ship Redraw Area
5. After the ship redraw area has been set, outpress the Set button, to exit the ship section
redraw area setup mode.
To turn on and setup the relative motion mode, do the following:
1. In the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab, press the Relative button in the Ship Motion Mode section. In the
relative motion mode, the own ship symbol is stationary and the chart is moving.
2. The own ship position can be set in the following ways:
a. In the center – tick the Ship in centre checkbox and the ship will always
be in the center of the screen.
b. Manually – in the Manual Center panel check the Enable box to activate
the manual selection of the fixed ship position. Then press the Set button
and in the chart view select the fixed ship position by left-clicking in the Figure 174 Navi Æ
selected position (the selection mode is indicated by a red frame around Navigation Data tab,
the chart view). Manual Center
section
c. Automatically – if the Ship in center or the Enable manual center
checkboxes are clear, the own ship position in the chart view is set on the outer boundary of the
own ship redraw area.
7.5.6 Light Sectors
The ECDIS allows displaying lights sectors and their visibility distances in the chart view.
To turn on and setup the lights sectors display, do the following:
60
Both true motion and relative motion modes work only together with the navigation mode on.

1. Open the Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab and switch to the Light sectors tab.
Figure 175 Chart Æ Chart Presentation tab, Light sectors tab

2. To turn on the display of the limits of light sectors with the length corresponding to the actual visibility
distance of the lights, check the Real length checkbox. The visibility distance is not calculated; it is taken
from the light attributes and corresponds to the bridge height of 5 meters.
3. To turn on the highlight of light sectors in the chart view, check the Highlight sectors checkbox. Sectors
display is limited with the sectors visibility distance.
4. Select the sectors to be highlighted in the Highlight section.
a. To highlight sectors of user-specified lights, select the Chosen sectors option. To specify a light in
the chart view, move the mouse pointer to the light (the pointer will change to the ‘target’ pointer
with a tip Select light sectors) and right-click on it. The sectors of the light will be highlighted. To
unselect the light, move the mouse pointer to the selected light (the pointer will change to the
‘target’ pointer with a tip Unselect light sectors) and right-click on it. The highlight of the light will
be cleared.
b. To highlight sectors of all lights, select the All sectors option.
c. To highlight only white sectors, select the White sectors option.
d. To highlight all light sectors in the area, press the Static button.
e. To highlight only sectors visible from the own ship, press the Ship button. Display of lights sectors
covering the own ship position only works in the navigation mode. When the navigation mode is off,
this function is automatically switched to the static mode.
7.6 Alarms
The ECDIS provides the system of alarms which announces by audible and visual means conditions
requiring attention.
When an alarm is activated, it is displayed in the Alarms panel and the Alarm button starts flashing red
.
IMPORTANT!
No use of the Silent Mode is allowed while the own ship is underway as it may affect safety of navigation.
The audible indication can be enabled or disabled only for all alarm conditions: there is a general alarm
buzzer control in the Config Æ Alarm Setup tab. To allow using audible alarm indication for all alarm
conditions, check the Buzzer On/Off checkbox. To switch to the Silent Mode, clear the checkbox and
confirm the operation. The silent mode is indicated in the chart view: the Silent mode notice is displayed in
the upper left corner of the chart view.

Figure 176 Config Æ Alarm Setup tab, Buzzer On/Off checkbox

7.6.1 Alarms and Warnings Panel
When an alarm is activated, a message describing the alarm is displayed
in the Alarm Conditions indicator and the Alarms indicator starts flashing
red to attract attention. If the message is not displayed completely because
of the lack of space, move the mouse pointer over it to open a tool tip with
the complete message text. Figure 177 Alarms and Alarm
The alarm is added to the alarms list. To open the alarms list and view all Conditions indicators with the
alarms activated at the moment, click on the Alarm indicator. alarm message tooltip
Figure 178 Alarms and Cautions panel, Alarms tab

Activated alarm triggers sound indication and Alarms indicator flashing. To stop the sound indication and
indicator flashing, the alarm should be acknowledged. There are several ways to acknowledge an alarm.
To acknowledge an alarm, do the following:
1. Click on the alarm message in the Alarms panel.
2. Open the alarms list (click on the Alarms indicator) and left-click on the alarm entry. The loud-speaker
symbol is removed and the entry is moved to the last position in the list; the next alarm entry is
highlighted.
3. To acknowledge other alarms, use UP and DOWN arrow keys to select alarm entries and ENTER or
SPACE keys to confirm the acknowledgement.
After it has been acknowledged, the alarm is deactivated and its entry is deleted from the alarms list if the
alarm condition is not true anymore; otherwise the alarm is deactivated but its entry remains in the alarms
list. In some cases alarms are deactivated automatically after the alarm condition disappeared.
Besides alarms, there is another category of situations demanding attention on the part of the user:
warnings. Warnings are notices to the user which do not require acknowledgement and do not trigger the
alarm buzzer.
In case there are active warnings, the Warnings indicator becomes yellow. Click on the indicator to open the
Alarms and Warnings panel. In the Warnings tab there is a list of all currently active warnings. Warnings
are removed from the list as soon as the warning condition is cleared.
In the Alarms and Warnings panel you can also acknowledge all AIS and ARPA targets. To acknowledge
AIS targets, press the Ack all AIS button; to acknowledge all ARPA targets, press the Ack all Targets
button.

7.6.2 Antigrounding Alarm
The ECDIS allows to set an anti-grounding guard zone ahead the own ship. All objects entering the guard
zone and considered to be dangerous activate the alarm.
To turn on and setup the anti-grounding alarm, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Antigrounding alarm tab.
Figure 179 Config Æ Alarm Setup tab, Antigrounding alarm tab

2. Set the anti-grounding guard zone area: it can be defined either by the time of prediction value or by the
dangers safety distance – the zone with the bigger area is considered as the anti-grounding guard zone.
a. Time of prediction: enter a time value to the Time of prediction field (default time is 5 minutes).
The time of prediction defines the length of the anti-grounding guard zone which is the distance the
own ship will cover for the specified time proceeding with the current speed.
b. Dangers safety distance: enter a distance value to the Dangers safety distance (measurement
units are set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab). The guard-zone will be build using the set
distance.
3. To turn the display of the guard zone in the chart view on, check the Guard Zone Sector checkbox. To
turn the guard zone display off, clear the checkbox.
4. Select the guard zone angle in the drop-down list to the right from the Guard Zone Sector checkbox.
The angle of the guard zone can be set between 5 and 90 degrees. By reducing the angle to 5 degrees,
you will only have warnings of danger objects in front of the vessel.
5. To enable highlighting of danger objects located inside the guard zone, check the Danger Objects
Inside Guard Zone checkbox.
6. After you have set the anti-grounding alarm parameters, press the Set Parameters button for the
parameters to take effect.
When the anti-grounding alarm with the guard zone and highlighting of danger objects inside the zone are
activated, all objects with depths less than the set safety contour value will be highlighted in red inside the
guard zone. The danger objects are also added to the dangers and cautions lists. If a danger object is found
in the guard zone, the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes red and is called Dangers. If a caution
object is found in the guard zone, the Dangers and Cautions indicator becomes orange and is called
Cautions. To view the Dangers and Cautions lists, click on the Dangers and Cautions indicator: the
Dangers/Cautions tab will open with the Dangers and Cautions tabs in it 61 .
61
In order to use the anti-grounding functionality efficiently, it is important to set the Safety Contour correctly in the
chart presentation (see chapter 5.6.5, Depth Settings).
The anti-grounding function uses the safety contour value and the own ship draft to determine anti-grounding warnings.

Figure 180 Display of the Guard Zone and danger objects inside the zone
7.6.3 Alarms
The ECDIS provides the possibility to set a depth alarm activated when the depth below keel is more or less
of the set depth limit as well as alarms when a detected AIS or ARPA target is lost.
To set the depth alarm, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab.
Figure 181 Config Æ Alarm Setup tab, Alarms tab

2. Enter the value of the depth below keel limit to the Depth below keel limit field. The measurement unit
for the depth is set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab.
3. Check the More than or the Less than checkboxes (both options can be set at the same time):
• More than – the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is
more than the set depth limit;
• Less than – the alarm is activated if the depth below keel value received from an input device is
less than the set depth limit.
4. After the depth alarms parameters have been set, press the Apply button 62 .
To set a target lost alarm, do the following:
62
The depth value received from an input device is displayed in the navigational panel in the following format: ‘DPT
30.0m’, where “30m” is the depth from the transducer to the sea bottom.
Depth information is displayed in the graph in the Info Æ Echo Sounder Diagram tab.

1. Open the Config Æ Alarm Setup tab and switch to the Alarms tab.
2. Check the Target lost alarm checkbox to set an alarm for loss of ARPA targets and the AIS lost alarm
checkbox for loss of AIS targets.
3. Settings are applied immediately/
7.6.4 Alarm Conditions List
¾ The following alarm conditions are processed in ECDIS:

• Position device is lost – The signal from the positioning device is not being received. To
deactivate the alarm, click on the alarm message.
• Ship is out of coverage – The own ship is not in the chart view. The alarm is deactivated when the
own ship is in the chart view again. To avoid the own ship out of the chart view, use the navigation
mode (see chapter 7.5.1, Navigation Mode). In this mode, the ECDIS holds the own ship in the
chart view automatically.
• Chart level changing – An alarm is activated when the chart under the own ship symbol or under
the chart view center in case the own ship symbol is out of coverage is scaled to a chart with a
different scale level. The alarm is given to notify you that the ECDIS is working with a more or a less
detailed chart. To deactivate the alarm, click on the alarm message. The alarm is active for at least
30 seconds.
• Dangerous AIS – A dangerous AIS target is detected.
• Alert messages – An ALR (alert) message is received from an input device.
• Input device is lost – Signals from one of the external devices registered in the Config Æ
Input/Output tab are lost. The name of the device is indicated in the alarm message. To deactivate
the alarm, click on the alarm message.
• Safety contour is not available – The safety contour cannot be defined by the ECDIS in the
current chart view. If the safety contour is not defined the ECDIS is not able to notify you about such
dangerous situations as crossing the safety contour or danger of grounding. In this situation, you
should pay special attention to the chart data and aids to navigation. The alarm is deactivated when
the ECDIS defines the safety contour.
• Not for use with Position device – A small-scale chart is currently displayed in the chart view and
it cannot be used for offshore navigation. To deactivate the alarm, click on the alarm message.
• Destination approached – The alarm notifies that a control point on the route is being approached
(see chapter 6.4.5, Adding Critical Points). The alarm message will indicate the number and the
name of the control point. To deactivate the alarm, click on the alarm message.
• Man Over Board – An alarm is activated when the MOB button is pressed. The alarm is
deactivated after the click on the alarm message, but the message is displayed for 20 seconds in
any case.
• Exceed deviation – The deviation of the own ship from the route exceeds the XTE (cross track
error) set for the route in the route plan (see chapter 6.4.4, Route Plan). The alarm is deactivated
when the own ship returns to the XTE limits.
• Invalid sensor data – Data coming from one of external sensors are invalid.
• Non-WGS 84 Datums – The chart currently displayed in the chart view has other than WGS-84
coordinates system. If the positioning device defines the own ship position in WGS-84 coordinates
and the chart has a different coordinates system, the own ship position in the chart view may be
wrong. If the alarm is activated, it is recommended to introduce a position correction in the Config
Æ Input/Output tab (see chapter 7.2.4, Position Correction). The alarm is deactivated when a
WGS-84 chart will be displayed in the chart view.
• Target lost – An ARPA target is lost. The alarm is generated if the target was lost while inside the
set Lost Target Alarm Range. If the target was lost while outside the range, no alarm is generated.
• AIS lost – An AIS target is lost.
• Dangerous target – A dangerous ARPA target is detected.
• Hardware errors – A hardware error occurred.

7.7 Route Monitoring

7.7.1 Route Monitoring Mode
The route monitoring mode is switched on automatically when the voyage on a specified route is started.
When in the route monitoring mode, the ECDIS monitors the proceeding of the own ship along the route and
notifies you in case the own ship deviates from the route, approaches a waypoint or a control point, etc.
Before you can start a voyage along a route, the route should be created and edited using the route planning
tools in the Route Æ Route Finder and Route Æ Route Planning tabs (see chapter 6.4, Route Planning
and Plotting).
To switch on the route monitoring mode, do the following:
1. Open the Route Æ Start Voyage tab.
Figure 182 Route Æ Start Voyage tab

2. Select a route in the table of routes in the left-hand part of the tab. To show the route in the chart view,
press the Show Route button. To hide the route, press the Hide Route button.
3. Indicate the waypoints of the route between which route will be monitored. In the From table select the
start waypoint and in the To table select the end waypoint. Table headers will display the time of
departure from the start waypoint and the time of arrival to the end waypoint (in the brackets).
4. If the system is connected to an autopilot, check the Autopilot ON/OFF checkbox, and the ECDIS will
start sending NMEA sentences in the APB format (autopilot sentence “B”) to your autopilot.
5. To switch to the route monitoring mode, press the Start Voyage button. The ECDIS will start monitoring
the own ship on the route. In the route monitoring mode, the route is shown in red; the voyage
information panel is displayed under the navigational panel and the Voyage indicator state changes
according to the current voyage situation. Also when in the route monitoring mode, the ‘Destination
approached’ and ‘Exceed deviation’ alarms can be activated if set in the Config Æ Alarm Setup Æ
Alarms tab.
6. To quit the route monitoring mode, outpress the Start Voyage button and confirm the operation.
¾ The following route monitoring options can be set in the Route Æ Start Voyage tab:
• To set a pre-turn warning, switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre-turn warning
field. Within the specified time from the course shift point, the Voyage indicator in the indicators
panel (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel) will switch to the WOP Warn state (the indicator color will
become orange).
• To set a pre-turn acknowledgement, switch to the Settings tab and enter time values to the Pre-
turn acknowledgement field. Within the specified time from the wheel over position, the Voyage
indicator in the indicators panel (see chapter 2.3, Indicators Panel) will switch to the WOP Ack state
(the indicator color will become red).
• To be able to see tooltips when moving the mouse pointer over a waypoint in the chart view, switch
to the Settings tab and check the WPT tooltips checkbox.
• To reverse the route so that the end point becomes the start point, press the Reverse Route button
and confirm the operation. To restore the route initial direction, outpress the Reverse route button
and confirm the operation.

• If the WPT labels checkbox is set, waypoint labels are displayed on the route in the route
monitoring mode. If the checkbox is not set, the Bearing label and the Speed label options are not
available.
• If the Bearing label checkbox is set the planned bearing to the next waypoint will be displayed on
each leg of the route.
• If the Speed label checkbox is set the planned speed to the next waypoint will be displayed on
each leg.
• If the WOL checkbox is set the wheel-over line is displayed at the next waypoint. The wheel-over
line marks the position of the course change. The WOL line is only displayed in the next waypoint
and is parallel to the next leg.
7.7.2 Route Monitoring Panel
After the voyage start the Route Monitoring panel opens. In the panel, information about the route is
displayed.
¾ The following route monitoring data are displayed in the Route Monitoring panel:
• Route name –Name of the route that is being monitored;
• WPT – Number of the next waypoint and number of waypoints in the
route;
• Name – Name of the next waypoint;
• TTG – Time to go from the current own ship position to the next
waypoint:
− If the indicator is green, the own ship proceeds in the direction
of the next waypoint;
− If the indicator is red, the own ship proceeds in the direction
inverse to the direction of the next waypoint or does not move
at all;
• TTA – Time to arrival from the current own ship position to the end
waypoint;
• ETA – Estimated time and date of arrival to the end waypoint;
• DTG – Distance to go from the current waypoint to the end
waypoint; Figure 183 Route Monitoring
panel
• BTW – Bearing to the next waypoint from the own ship (depends on
the own ship current position);
• BWW – Bearing from the current waypoint to the next waypoint;
• DWP – Distance from the current own ship position to the next waypoint;
• XTD – Cross track distance on the leg; the value is positive if the own ship is to the left from the
route, and negative is the own ship is to the right from the route;
− If the indicator is green, the actual XTD is less than the planned XTD on the leg;
− If the indicator is red, the actual XTD exceeds the planned XTD on the leg;
• WPT – List of waypoints that are not passed yet; select a waypoint in the list and in the TTG and
ETA lines below the time to go to and the estimated time of arrival to the selected waypoint are
displayed respectively;
• TTG – Time to go from the current own ship position to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list;
• ETA – Estimated time and date of arrival to the waypoint selected in the waypoints list.

7.7.3 Go to Waypoint Function
The Go to Waypoint function allows you to plot one waypoint that will be your destination. For example if
you are approaching a pilot station and port control suggests you drop anchor at some position and wait for
the pilot there, you may use the Go to waypoint function to set the required point and proceed there without
the full route planning procedure.
To use the Go to Waypoint function, do the following:
1. Stop the voyage if you are in the route monitoring mode.
2. Open the Route Æ Go To tab.
Figure 184 Route Æ Go To tab

3. Press the Set WP button to switch to the waypoint plotting mode. Plot the waypoint in the chart window
or enter the waypoint coordinates in the WPT LAT and WPT LON fields.
4. Release the Set WP button (when pressed, its name changes to Save) to quit the waypoint plotting
mode.
5. If the system is connected to an autopilot, check the Autopilot ON/OFF checkbox, and the ECDIS will
start sending sentences in the APB format (autopilot sentence “B”) to your autopilot.
6. To switch to the route monitoring mode (monitoring of the route to the waypoint), press the Start button.
To quit the route monitoring mode, outpress the Start button (when pressed, its name changes to Stop).
7. To check the route from the own ship to the waypoint, press the Check route button. The route from your
vessel to the waypoint will be checked in the same way as in the Route Planning tool (two additional
panels will appear: the Dangers and the Cautions panels). The check route function only works in the
route monitoring mode.
Figure 185 Route Æ Go to Waypoint tab, Dangers and Cautions tabs

8. To view the waypoint in the chart view, press the Show button; to hide the waypoint, outpress the Show
button (when pressed, its name changes to Hide).

8. NAVIGATIONAL INFORMATION TOOLS

8.1 Echo Sounder
If an echo sounder is registered in the ECDIS in the Config Æ Input/Output tab, the own ship depth data
are coming to the system. The depth data are displayed in the navigational panel in the DPT line as well as
in the Info Æ Echo Sounder Diagram tab.
The DPT line in the navigational panel contains two values separated by a slash: the first value is the depth
from the water line to the transducer and the second value is the depth from the transducer to the sea
bottom.
¾ The echo sounder diagram is made up of the following elements:

1. Time and depth axes: the time axis is the horizontal axis, and the depth axis is the vertical axis. The time
is measured in minutes, the depth measurement units are set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab, in
the Depth/Elevation/Size units section.
Figure 186 Info Æ Echo Sounder Diagram tab

2. The diagram field: double-click in any position in the diagram field and the own ship position
corresponding to the time and depth values in the identified diagram position will be marked in the chart
view with an arrow mark (to clear the highlight, press the Clear highlight button). Using this option,
you can mark such things as special places or fish echoes.
3. The current draft graph: the red dashed graph represents the current draft of the own ship. The data for
building the graph come from the Config Æ Own ship tab.
4. The depth below keel graph: the black solid graph represents the depth from the transducer to the sea
bottom. The data for building the graph come from the external echo sounder.
To display sounding marks in the chart view, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Echo Sounder Diagram tab.
2. Check the Marks ON/OFF checkbox. The sounding marks will be plotted in the chart view as the own
ship proceeds.
3. Select the interval of the marks plotting in the intervals list.
4. To delete all previously plotted sounding marks from the chart view, press the Reset button.
For the depth to be more precise, set the echo sounder sensor offset from the own ship keel. To do so:
1. Open the Config panel and go to the Own Ship tab and then to the Position of Instruments tab.
2. Select the Echosounder in the instruments list.

Figure 187 Config Æ Own Ship Æ Position of Instruments tab

3. Set the offset of the instrument along the X, Y and Z axis in the … offset fields. NOTE that the password
is required to save the settings.
4. Save the settings by pressing the Save settings button.
8.2 AIS
The ECDIS implements the full support for the Automatic Identification System. Using the AIS functionality,
you can receive and view AIS data of the AIS targets located at a specified distance from the own ship and
display the data in the chart view. You can also receive messages from the AIS targets and send the own
ship AIS data and other messages to other vessels.
IMPORTANT!
For the ECDIS to be able to receive AIS data, the AIS receiver should be registered in the ECDIS. The
registration is carried out in the Config Æ Input/Output tab. This can only be done by the installer.
8.2.1 AIS Targets Data

Information of all AIS targets with which the contact has been established is displayed in the Info Æ AIS
Monitor tab. The tab is made up of two panes: one of the panes contains the list of all AIS targets, and the
other displays detailed information about a specified target.
Figure 188The Info Æ AIS Monitor tab

To view a target’s information, select the target in the targets list. The information is displayed in two tabs:
the Position Report tab and the Static and Voyage Related Data tab.
On the Position Report tab, the following target information is displayed:
• MMSI – A unique 9-digit number that is assigned to a DSC radio station;
• Ship Name – Name of the AIS target (in case the target has any name);
• CPA – Closest point of approach to the own ship;
• TCPA – Time to the closest point of approach;
• Type of ship – Type of the AIS target;
• Lat/Lon – Latitude and longitude of the AIS target;
• Position accuracy – accuracy of the AIS target positioning;
• COG – Course over ground;
• SOG – Speed over ground;
• HDG – Heading of the AIS target;
• ROT – Rate of turn;
• Nav Status – Navigation status of the target e.g. Under way using engine;
• Range/Bearing – distance and bearing from the own ship to the target.
In the Static and Voyage Related Data tab, the following target information is
displayed:
• IMO Number – the IMO assigned target number;
• Call Sign – a unique designation for the transmitting station;
• Ship dimensions – length and width of the target;
• Position ref. point– defines the precise location of the positioning device
on the target; four parameters are used: A, B, C, and D (Figure 189);
• Type of pos. device – the type of the device defining the target position;
• ETA – estimated time of arrival of the target to its destination;
Figure 189
• Draught – draught of the target;
Parameters defining
• Destination – destination of the target; the location of the
positioning device
• Messages – the last received message (if no messages were received,
the field is not displayed).
¾ Meeting point information and display

On the Meeting point info tab, Figure 190, coordinates of the meeting point, time to go to the meeting point,
etc. (calculated under the assumption that own ship will keep on going along the route) are shown for targets
within the pre-defined corridor around the route, see step 12 in “AIS Targets Display Settings” on page
142 63 .
Double left-click here
Figure 190 The Meeting point info tab

The meeting pont is in blue on the chart, Figure 191.
The program might not be able to calculate parameters of the meeting point. Then the explanation will be
shown on the Meeting point info tab saying one of these:
• “Calculation failed”
Might be because there is no current route at the moment.
• “Own ship far away from route”
• “AIS far away from route”
63

Own ship/ target is outside the pre-defined corridor around the route.
• “Meeting point far away from route”
The meeting point exists but lies outside the pre-defined corridor around the route.
• “Meeting point does not exist”.
Own ship has already met the target or cannot catch it up.
• Meeting point calculations might be impossible due to own ship motion “backwards”, invalid AIS data,
etc.
The same information about the meeting point with an AIS target can be shown in an independent window.
To do so, double left-click as shown in Figure 190 or right-click the symbol of a target in the chart view,
Figure 191.
Right-click
here
Meeting
point
Figure 191 Meeting point information window and point indicator on the chart
An arbitrary number of windows can be opened in this way 64 , The last of them stays marked with orange
frame on the title bar and on the chart.
To close all open windows at a time, press the Close displays, Figure 190.
¾ Dangerous target indication

When the distance between an AIS target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous
approach set in the Config Æ AIS tab, the target is assigned the dangerous target status and changes its
style: it becomes red and starts flashing. To stop the target flashing, select it in the targets table in the Info
Æ AIS Monitor tab and press the Acknowledge button. The target still has the dangerous target style, but
stops flashing. To acknowledge all dangerous targets, press the Acknowledge all button.
¾ Sorting AIS targets on the target list

The function has been implemented to sort AIS targets on the list on the Info-AIS monitor tab according to a
user-defined criterion 65 .
To do so, select a criterion on the list as shown in Figure 188:
• Order inflow
Targets are sorted by the first incoming message time.
• Dist to target/
• Dist to dangerous target
Dangerous targets stand higher on the list than safe ones.
• CPA/ TCPA
64
65

Targets are sorted by the value of:
CPAcurrent/CPAmin + TCPAcurrent/TCPAmin
Attention!
Use of this criterion is a mere recommendation. Consider whether or not it is really applicable to evaluation
of navigation safety under the current conditions, since there is no guarantee that really dangerous targets
will stand higher on the list.
• Name
• MMSI
• Meeting time
Targets are sorted in an increasing Meeting time order.
• Forward/ Backward targets
Targets ahead/ back on the route stand higher on the list.
Attention!
Targets to which the selected criterion does not apply are typed in grey on the list.
¾ Viewing messages from a target

To view messages received from an AIS target, do the following:
1. Select an AIS target in the targets list. If there were any messages from the target, the Show Received
Messages button becomes active (otherwise it’s grayed).
2. To view messages, press the Show Received Messages button. The Received Messages window will
open where all messages from the AIS target are displayed.
Figure 192 AIS messages, Received

8.2.2 AIS Targets Messages window Display Settings
AIS targets can be displayed in the chart view. Using the AIS targets display functionality, you can evaluate
the current situation at one glance.
To turn the display of AIS targets on or off, left-click on the AIS indicator. If the display of AIS targets is off,
the AIS indicator is orange ; if the display of AIS targets is on, the AIS indicator is green .
The activation of the AIS targets display depends on the targets distance and time from the own ship. The
activation distances and time are configured in the Config Æ AIS tab.
To configure the activation distances and time for AIS targets, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ AIS tab, Figure 193.
Figure 193 Config Æ AIS tab, activation distances and time settings
2. Check or uncheck the Auto activation checkbox: if the checkbox is checked, the Distance to
Activation field becomes editable and you can set the value of the distance to activation different from
the distance to dangerous approach value; if the checkbox is unchecked, the value of the distance to
activation is set the same as the value of the distance to dangerous approach.
3. To be able to use the own ship AIS transmitter as a positioning device, check the Use own transmitter
as source of position checkbox. The transmitter will be added to the position sources list in the
Position Source section of the Navi Æ Navigation Data tab (see chapter 7.2.1, Primary and Secondary
Position Sources).
4. To view AIS symbols in true scale, set the True scale symbol checkbox. AIS targets are displayed in
true scale if the following conditions are met:
a. width of the own ship true scale symbol is more than 7.5mm;
b. the AIS target is within the activation distance;
c. the AIS target heading (HDG) and position reference point data are available.
5. Set the Distance to Dangerous: the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as
dangerous. Press the Set button for the changes to take effect.
6. Set the Distance to Activation: the distance from the own ship at which all AIS targets are displayed as
active. This value should be more than the distance to dangerous approach. If the Distance to
Activation field is inactive, and you want to change the value, check the Automatic Activation
checkbox. Press the Set button for the changes to take effect.
7. Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA/TCPA to Dangerous section: if the actual CPA or TCPA of the
own ship and an AIS target are less than the set values, the target is displayed as dangerous. Press the
Set button for the changes to take effect.
8. Set the AIS targets visibility range: the distance from the own ship at which AIS targets become visible.
When targets cross the distance limit they are displayed on the chart. Turn the function on (check the
checkbox), enter the value to the edit field, and press the Set button. When the checkbox is checked, the
visibility range is displayed in the chart view as a circle with a blue dashed boundary (see Error!
Reference source not found.).
If you want all AIS targets to be displayed irrespective of their distance from the own ship, turn the AIS
targets visibility range function off altogether (clear the checkbox); the AIS targets visibility range
section will become grayed and all AIS targets in contact with the own ship will become visible.
9. Turn the display of AIS zones on or off: check or clear options in the
AIS zones display section. AIS zones are displayed as circles with
the center in the own ship position and with radiuses corresponding to
AIS targets activation distances. The AIS targets activation range is
displayed as a blue circle and the AIS targets danger range is
displayed as a red circle. If the display of AIS targets is off, the AIS
zones are not displayed either.
10. To turn on the display of AIS targets past track, check the Past track
checkbox. The past track is updated with the interval set in the Past
track interval drop-down list.

Figure 194 AIS zones display
11. Switch on the Show meeting point option to activate the target motion prediction function and indication
of the meeting point on the chart, see “AIS Targets Data” on page 139.
12. Enter the corridor width value into the Min distance from route filed within which the prediction function
will be effective.
Depending on the presence of the AIS target signal and the distance between the target and the own ship,
there are the following types of AIS targets:
Table 3 AIS target types
Symbol name and description Signal Distance to the Display

Own Ship
AIS Targets
Sleeping target Yes AIS targets visibility

A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of range
an object equipped with an AIS in a certain location.
Active target Yes distance to activation

A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation
of a sleeping target for the display of additional
graphically presented information including a vector
(speed and course over ground), the heading, and ROT
or direction of turn indicator (if available) to display actual
initiated course changes.
Dangerous target Yes distance to

A symbol representing an AIS target (activated or not) dangerous
which has approached the own ship closer than the approach;
specified distance to the dangerous approach. CPA < CPA to
Dangerous;
TCPA < TCPA to
Dangerous
Lost target No AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS range
target before reception of data was interrupted.
Selected target Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the manual selection of any AIS range
target for the display of detailed information in a separate
data panel.

Symbol name and description Signal Distance to the Display

Own Ship
NOTE:
All AIS target symbols are oriented to the targets course. Active and dangerous target symbols have
additional features: heading lines and velocity vectors. Heading line is a solid line with the turn indicator at
the tip; it only shows the targets heading and does not give any information on the targets speed. Velocity
vector is a dashed line with minute marks on it; it is extending in the direction of the target course for a length
representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval used for own ship’s velocity vector.
Symbols of AIS targets with available CPA are drawn with solid lines , if CPA is not available symbols are
drawn with dotted lines .
AIS Aids to Navigation (ATON)
Active ATON (real/virtual) on position Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing an active ATON on position. range
Active ATON (real/virtual) off position Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing an active ATON off position. range
Selected ATON (real/virtual) Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing manual selection of any AIS target range
for the display of detailed information in a separate data
panel.
Lost ATON (real/virtual) No AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the last valid position of an ATON range
before reception of data was interrupted.
AIS Search and Rescue Transmitters (AIS SART)
Active AIS SART Yes distance to activation

A symbol representing an active AIS SART, length of the
velocity vector shows the distance the target will travel in
the time interval used for own ship’s velocity vector.
Selected AIS SART Yes AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing manual selection of any AIS target range
for the display of detailed information in a separate data
panel.
Lost AIS SART No AIS targets visibility

A symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS range
SART before reception of data was interrupted.
All AIS Targets
The target is not displayed Yes out of the AIS targets no display
Targets are displayed only if they approach to the own visibility range
ship closer than the AIS targets visibility range to avoid
cluttering.
The target is not displayed No any distance no display

no comments

The program can recognize AIS targets of the «S&R aircraft» type. Targets like these are indicated on the
66
chart as .
8.3 ARPA
The ECDIS implements the full support for the ARPA data. Using the ARPA functionality, you can receive
and view data of targets located by ARPA and display the data in the chart view.
IMPORTANT!
For the ECDIS to be able to receive ARPA data, ARPA should be registered in the ECDIS. The registration
is carried out in the Config Æ Input/Output tab.
8.3.1 ARPA Targets Data

When ARPA equipment is connected and configured in the Config Æ Input/Output tab, ARPA targets can
be monitored in the ECDIS. Target information can be viewed in the Info Æ Targets tab. The ARPA Targets
tab displays information about targets located and monitored with ARPA.
Figure 195 Info Æ Targets tab, ARPA Targets tab

To view a target information, select the target in the targets list.
¾ In the ARPA Targets tab, the following target information is displayed:

• Target number – Target number
• Name – Target name
• CPA – Closest point of approach
• TCPA – Time to closest point of approach
• Lat/Lon – The latitude and longitude of the target
• COG – Course over ground
• SOG – Speed over ground
• Status – Status of the target (lost, tracking etc.)
• Range – Distance from the own ship to the target
• Bearing – Bearing to the target from own ship
• True/Relative – Indicates if the target heading vector is true or relative. If the vector is measured in
relation to the North direction, it is true; and if it is measured in relation to the own ship course, it is
relative.
66

To scroll the chart view so that to display a target in the chart view center, double-click on a target entry.
When the distance between an ARPA target and the own ship becomes less than the distance to dangerous
approach set in the Config Æ Targets tab, the target is assigned the dangerous target status and changes
its style: it becomes red and starts flashing. To stop the target flashing, select it in the targets table in the
Info Æ Targets tab and press the Acknowledge button. The target will still have the dangerous target style,
but will cease flashing. To acknowledge all dangerous targets, press the Acknowledge all button.
8.3.2 ARPA Targets Display
To turn the display of ARPA targets on or off, left-click on the ARPA indicator. If the display of ARPA targets
is off, the ARPA indicator is orange ; if the display of ARPA targets is on, the ARPA indicator is
green .
To configure the display of ARPA targets and tracks, do the following:
1. Open the Config Æ Targets tab. The display of ARPA targets is configured in the ARPA sub-tab.
Figure 196 Config Æ Targets tab, ARPA sub-tab

2. To turn on the display of the track passed by targets, check the Past track checkbox. Select the interval
of the track update in the Past track interval drop-down list (the interval value ranges from 1 second to
30 minutes).
3. Set the distance to dangerous approach in the Distance to Dangerous field: enter a value in nautical
miles to the field and press the Set button for the setting to take effect. When a target approaches the
own ship to the distance closer than the distance to dangerous, the target symbol changes to the
dangerous target symbol and starts flashing.
For the symbol to cease flashing, acknowledge the target. To acknowledge a target, open the Info Æ
Targets tab, ARPA sub-tab, select the target in the targets table and press the Acknowledge button; to
acknowledge all targets, press the Acknowledge all button. The target symbol will stop flashing.
4. Set the lost target alarm range: enter a value in nautical miles to the Lost Target Alarm Range and
press the Set button for the setting to take effect. If a target was lost while inside the set range, a Target
Lost alarm is generated; if outside the set range, no alarm is generated.
5. Set the CPA and TCPA limits in the CPA/TCPA to Dangerous section and press the Set button for the
changes to take effect. If the actual CPA or TCPA of the own ship and a target are less than the set
values, the target is displayed as dangerous.
Depending on the presence of signal from targets and the distance between the targets and the own ship,
there are the following types of ARPA targets:
Symbol name and description Signal Distance ARPA targets

display
Target in acquisition state Yes any distance

The target detected in an acquisition area is
displayed as a flashing dashed red circle. It flashes
until it is acknowledged in the Info Æ Targets tab.
If the target is dangerous its color stays red; if it is
not dangerous its color changes to green.

Symbol name and description Signal Distance ARPA targets

display
Tracked target Yes any distance
Dangerous target Yes distance to

If a target approaches the own ship to the distance dangerous
closer than the distance to dangerous approach approach; or
set in the Config Æ Targets tab, it is designated CPA < CPA to
the dangerous status and the target symbol Dangerous; or
becomes red and starts flashing. The target TCPA < TCPA to
flashes until it is acknowledged. Once dangerous
acknowledged, targets remain red until not
dangerous anymore.
Selected target Yes any distance

Target selected in the chart view is automatically
selected in the targets table in the Info Æ Targets
tab.
Lost target No any distance

A symbol representing the last valid position of a
target before reception of data was interrupted.
Reference target Yes any distance

Tracked radar targets designated as reference
targets are labeled with the letter “R”.
no display No any distance no display
All target symbols are oriented to the targets course. The target symbols have speed vectors extended in the
direction of the targets course for a length representing the distance the target will travel in the time interval
used for own ship’s prediction vector (COG = 90°, SOG = 10kn, prediction time interval =
3min).
8.4 Radar Image Overlay

The ECDIS provides the possibility to display data received from radar in the chart view as a radar image
overlaying the chart.
To turn the display of the radar image on or off, left-click on the Radar indicator. If the display of the radar
image is off, the Radar indicator is orange ; if the display of the radar image is on, the Radar
indicator is green .
To configure the display of the radar image, do the following:
1. Open the Info ÆRadar Image tab. If no radar board is connected to the ECDIS, all controls of the Radar
Image tab are inactive.

Figure 197 Info Æ Radar Image tab

The option has been implemented to select an image from one of the two radars registered with the
system 67 .
2. To select a radar, click the Radar 1/ Radar 2 button.
3. To start reading radar signal, press the Start Radar button; when pressed the name is Stop Radar.
4. To turn the display of the radar image on or off, use the Hide radar image checkbox (it works in the
same way as the Radar indicator described above). To hide the radar image, check the checkbox; to
display the radar image, clear the checkbox.
5. To turn on the display of a special symbol indicating the position of the radar on board the own ship,
check the Show position checkbox. The radar position is set in the Config Æ Own Ship Æ Radar tab.
6. Set a radar range: select a value in the Radar Ranges list.
7. In the informational Radar Pulse section, the radar pulse duration is displayed.
8. To set values of different clutters to optimize the radar picture, use options from the Clutters section: the
Sea, the Rain, and the Gain clutters. When setting values to clutters you can either use sliders or select
a value from drop-down lists. For Sea and Gain clutters there is a possibility to set them to auto
configuring; to do so check the Auto checkboxes.
9. To adjust the radar image orientation, use the Orientation Adjustment scale.
10. In case there are failures in transmission of one of radar pulses (video, synchro, bearing or heading),
indicator of this pulse in the Radar Diagnostics section is colored red. If there are no failures, indicators
are green.
To use the radar image overlay functionality the ECDIS has to be connected to a PCI radar processor board.
8.5 Anti-collision Display
IMPORTANT!
Official anti-collision tools that must be used for decision making are type approved Radar/ARPA, or ATA, or
EPA. This anti-collision tool may only be used as a supplementary tool.
IMPORTANT!
The Anti-collision display module requires individual licensing.
The anti-collision display functionality is implemented to make it easier for you to evaluate the danger of
collision of the own ship with other vessels located with external input devices. The functionality is also
meant to help you to calculate and carry out maneuvers for passing the vessels at safe distances.
The anti-collision display functionality has two functions:
67

• To indicate that the own ship has approached another vessel to the user-specified distance and
time (see chapter 8.5.4, Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits);
• To indicate the possibility of collision (see chapter 8.5.5, Indication of Collision Risk).
8.5.1 Theoretical Principles of the Anti-collision Display
Consider a collision scenario between own ship and an external target. The vessels’ encounter geometry is
plotted in Figure 198. The OOW can easily verify that the vessels have a potential point of collision (PPC)
from visual observation (i.e. aspect angle to target is unchanged) or from radar observation (i.e. relative
motion of target echo towards the centre of own ship).
Figure 198 Example of encounter geometry for own ship and a target on collision course
It is easy to see graphically that the PPC can be moved along the predicted track line of target if own ship
changes course to starboard and simultaneously increase speed, Figure 199.
Figure 199 Movement of PPC due to change of own ship course and speed

The vessels’ encounter geometry in different collision scenarios shows that a line displaced parallel to the in-
sight line between the vessels and drawn from the tip of target’s true vector can be regarded as a collision
danger line (CDL) in true motion, Figure 200.
Figure 200 Collision danger line in true motion display

The CDL has a very simple interpretation: if the tip of own ship’s vector touches the CDL, then a direct
collision threat exists and the vessels will collide if the speed and course are maintained. Likewise, any
maneuver (change of course and/or speed) that deflects the end of own ship’s velocity vector away from the
CDL is a potential evasive maneuver, Figure 201 - Figure 203.
Figure 201 Evasive action by change of own ship’s course to starboard in order to pass astern of target

Figure 202 Evasive action by decrease of own ship’s speed in order to pass astern of target
Figure 203 Evasive action by a combination of change of own ship’s course and decrease of speed in order
to pass astern of target

The CDL can be displayed to any acquired target in a true motion overview because it is completely
independent of own ship’s speed and course. It is only depending on the target’s relative position, speed and
course. This means that collision risk can be judged simultaneously to all acquired targets in a true motion
overview with easy identification of possible evasive maneuvers, Figure 204 and Figure 205.
Figure 204 From judging the tip of own ship’s vector in relation to the CDLs it follows that there is a direct
collision threat to targets 2 and 5. Target 1 will pass slightly astern and targets 3 and 4 will pass ahead of
own ship if the motion parameters (speed and course) are maintained
Figure 205 A change of course to starboard is a potential evasive action by own ship. Targets 1, 2 and 3 will
pass well ahead, while targets 4 and 5 will pass astern of own ship if their course and speed are maintained

The CDL represents the situation where CPA = 0.0 n. miles. The general solution is an actual collision
danger sector (CDS) which can be found by introducing a safety margin (CPA limit) with respect to minimum
passing distance. Figure 206 shows the collision scenario (Figure 198) with simultaneous display of CDL and
relative vector (as it can be imagined from radar display).
Figure 206 Collision risk interpretation in: 1) true motion: Tip of own ship’s vector touches the collision
danger line to target. 2) relative motion: The relative vector has direction towards centre of own ship
Figure 207 shows that the safety margin can be introduced by a circle that is located at the centre of own
ship with radius equal the user-selected CPA limit. In the relative motion display of an ARPA radar the safety
margin is usually set by utilizing the variable range marker (VRM).
Figure 207 Introduction of safety margin representing a minimum passing distance at closest point of
approach

The solution to pass a distance equal to the selected safety margin (CPA limit) astern of target is shown by a
course change to starboard, which deflects the relative vector so its extension becomes a tangent to the
CPA limit circle, Figure 208. (This solution can be found by utilizing the ARPA Trial Maneuver functionality.)
Figure 208 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit: Change of own ship’s course in order to pass astern of
target with selected CPA limit (i.e. extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle)
The solution to pass a distance equal selected safety margin (CPA limit) ahead of target is shown by a
course change to port, Figure 209.
Figure 209 Introduction of safety margin CPA limit: Change of own ship’s course in order to pass ahead of
target with selected CPA limit (i.e. extension of relative vector touches the CPA limit circle)

Figure 208 and Figure 209 show that a sector-shaped region can be imagined in the relative motion display,
Figure 210.
Figure 210 Sector shaped collision danger region as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an
ARPA radar with safe passing distance set by the VRM radius from centre of own ship
This imagined region in the relative display can be regarded as a cone-shaped collision danger region in
which the user-selected safety margin is violated if the relative vector terminates inside the sector. It can be
transformed to appear in the true motion display as shown in Figure 211 and is hereinafter referred to as the
Collision Danger Sector (CDS).
Figure 211 Collision danger sector (CDS) (red) in true motion display as it appears from transformation of
collision danger sector as it can be imagined in relative motion display on an ARPA radar

The CDS has identical properties as the CDL and can thus be displayed to any acquired target in a true
motion overview. Figure 212 and Figure 213 show how the OOW easily can identify the exact amount of
evasive action required to pass with a minimum safety distance equal selected CPA limit. Traffic scenario
identical to Figure 204 and Figure 205.
Figure 212 Display of CDL/CDS to the acquired targets from Figure 204 and Figure 205. Safe areas are
easily identified in true motion overview
Figure 213 A change of course to starboard to pass ahead of target 4 and astern of target 1 with a safety
distance margin equal selected CPA limit

8.5.2 Graphic Elements of the Anti-collision Display
The anti-collision display functionality is based on visualization of potentially dangerous situations that can
result in collision. The anti-collision image is built of collision danger lines and sectors built in true motion
between the own ship and the targets surrounding it. If there is a danger of collision of the own ship and any
of the targets, or if the distance or the time to closest point of approach between the own ship and a target
are less than the user-specified limits, color indication is introduced in the anti-collision image. In the figure
below all main features of the anti-collision image are displayed.
Figure 214 Graphic elements of the anti-collision display
¾ The following graphic elements are used for the anti-collision display:
• Own Ship – the symbol of the own ship displayed in the position, received from the primary
positioning device;
• Target – the symbol of a target displayed in the position received from the target detection device;
• Own Ship Speed Vector/Target Speed Vector – vector predicting the position of the own
ship/target where the own ship/target will be in a specified time, proceeding at the current course
and velocity. For your convenience, the own ship speed vector is highlighted with a thick line and a
green circle;
• CPA limit – (Closest Point of Approach) – a circle with a radius equal to the minimum CPA set in
the Config Æ System Æ Anti-collision tab. If the own ship symbol enters the circle, the distance
between the own ship and the target is less than the set CPA limit.
• Collision danger sector (CDS) – if the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the collision
danger sector, the own ship is going to pass the target at a distance less than the set CPA limit.
• Collision danger line (CDL) – if the end of the own ship speed vector lies on the collision danger
line, the own ship and the target are on a collision course.
8.5.3 Configuration of the Anti-collision Display
The Anti-collision display is configured in the Config Æ Anti Collision Tool tab.
To configure the anti-collision display, do the following:

1. Open the Config Æ Anti Collision Tool tab.
Figure 215 Config Æ Anti Collision Tool tab

2. To turn the anti-collision display on, check the Anticollision ON/OFF checkbox. To turn the anti-collision
display off, clear the checkbox.
3. Set the time for prediction of the own ship position: select a value in the Vector Length drop-down list.
The time value defines the length of the own ship speed vector: the end of the vector points to the
position at which the own ship will be in the specified time.
4. Set the minimum CPA distance: enter a value to the Radius of CPA limit circle field. The minimum CPA
distance determines the safe passing distance between the own ship and a target. The allowable input
range is 0.0 to 5.0 nautical miles.
5. Set the maximum CPA distance: enter a value to the Maximum CPA field. If a target is at a distance to
the own ship equal or less than the maximum CPA distance, the target is relevant for the collision risk
evaluation. Targets with the CPA distance to the own ship larger than the maximum CPA are not
considered dangerous and are not included in the anti-collision display. The allowable input range is from
the specified CPA limit to 20.0 nautical miles.
6. Set the TCPA limit: enter a value to the TCPA limit field. If the target will reach the CPA to the own ship
in time equal or less than the TCPA limit, the target is relevant for the collision risk evaluation. The
allowable input range is 1.0 to 30.0 minutes. For the anti-collision display functionality to start processing
the target, the TCPA between the own ship and the target should be less than the specified TCPA limit,
and the distance between the target and the own ship should be less than the specified maximum CPA.
7. Set the critical TCPA: enter a value to the TCPA Critical field. The critical TCPA is the minimum time
needed for the own ship to carry out a maneuver for safe passing the target. The TCPA critical is only
used if the distance between the target and the own ship is less than the minimum CPA distance. The
allowable input range is 1.0 to the specified TCPA limit value.
8. To turn on the display of speed vectors of all activated targets, check the Target Vectors checkbox.
9. To activate all selections or any changes which are made after the initial selection, press the Apply
Parameters button.
8.5.4 Indication of Approach of Targets to Specified Time and Distance Limits
The indication of the approach of targets to the own ship to the specified time and distance limits is used to
warn the user that the distance and time between the own ship and the target have reached a critical value.
¾ The anti-collision functionality requires setting the following limits:

• The distance (maximum CPA) and time (TCPA limit) between the own ship and a target at which
the target is activated in the anti-collision display; and the user is recommended to start evaluating,
calculating and carrying out collision avoidance actions in case the collision risk exists;
• The critical distance (minimum CPA distance or radius of CPA limit circle) and time (TCPA critical)
at which the user has the minimum time to take decisions on collision avoidance actions.
The above described parameters are set in the Config Æ Anti Collision Tool tab.

The table below describes changes in graphic elements of the anti-collision display brought about by
changes in time and distance between the own ship and targets. The user-set minimum and maximum limits
of distance and time are compared to the actual CPA and TCPA of the own ship and targets and the
distance and time between the own ship and targets. Actual CPA and TCPA, and time and distance values
are displayed in the Info Æ AIS tab for AIS targetsa and in the Info Æ ARPA targets Æ ARPA targets tab
for ARPA targets.
Change Condition Image
Anti-collision display on (CPAactual < CPAmax) AND

(TCPAactual < TCPAmax)
CDL is highlighted with red TCPAactual < TCPAmin
CDS is off, CDL is displayed Distance < CPAmin
8.5.5 Indication of Collision Risk

The risk of collision of the own ship with a target is defined in the anti-collision display functionality by the
position of the own ship speed vector in relation to the CDS and CDL:
• If the end of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS, the distance at the CPA will be less
than the specified minimum CPA distance;
• If the end of the own ship speed vector lies directly on the CDL, the distance at the CPA will equal
zero, which means that the vessels will collide.
In both cases there is a risk of collision. To indicate the collision risk, the CDS is shaded orange.
If the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS, there is no collision risk, and the CDS is not shaded.

The table below shows how graphic elements of the anti-collision display change depending on the collision
risk.
Change Condition Image
CDS is not shaded The own ship speed

vector lies outside the
CDS.
CDS is shaded orange The own ship speed

vector lies inside the
CDS.
8.5.6 Example and Recommendations for the Anti-collision Display Use

Consider two vessels, own ship and a target, on collision course. The range from the own ship to the target
is 7.5 nautical miles and the bearing from the own ship to the target is 037º. The target speed is 15 knots and
the course is 270º. The own ship speed is 20 knots and the course is 000º.
1. The Figure 216 shows the display of the cone-shaped collision danger sector (CDS) and the collision
danger line (CDL) to the target in true motion. The user-defined target selection criteria are:
• CPA Limit = 1.0 NM
• Maximum CPA = 2.0 NM
• TCPA Limit = 24 min
• TCPA Critical = 6 min

Figure 216 The display of the cone-shaped collision danger region and line to the target in true motion
The green circle with the centre at the own ship position shows the tip of the own ship speed vector. This
is in order to make it visually easy for the user to determine the amount of evasive action needed to
satisfy the selected CPA limit.
When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies inside the CDS the sector is shaded orange color to
highlight the importance of the target for the collision risk evaluation. The Figure 216 shows a traffic
situation when own ship is on a direct collision course with the target as the tip of the speed vector lies
on the CDL (the red dashed line in the centre of the CDS).
2. When the tip of the own ship speed vector lies outside the CDS, there is no collision risk and the CDS is
not shaded. The Figure 217 shows that own ship has made a course change to starboard and will
therefore pass astern of the target with a distance slightly above the specified CPA limit.
Figure 217 Course change by the own ship to avoid collision

3. An alternative evasive action by the own ship is a speed reduction (here, from 20 to 14 knots (Figure
218)) in order to achieve the specified minimum CPA distance with a minimum deviation from the original
track line. The third alternative is a combination of course and speed change.
Figure 218 Speed change by the own ship to avoid collision

4. As the relative distance is decreasing, the own ship speed vector length has to be adjusted in order to
still be able to judge the collision risk and the potential evasive action. The Figure 219 shows that the
own ship speed vector length should be decreased below the present 12 minutes by using the Vector
Length option.
Figure 219 Adjust the vector length

5. The vector length is now decreased to 3 minutes and the OOW can still judge collision risk. The collision
danger sector and line are scaled accordingly.
Figure 220 The length of the own ship speed vector is changed to 3 minutes
6. When the actual TCPA is less than the specified minimum TCPA, the CDL is highlighted in red bold to
attract the attention of the user. Further decrease in the length of the own ship speed vector is required.
An evasive/escape action should be urgently considered by the user.
Figure 221 The TCPA is violating the TCPA Critical value – the collision danger line gets bold red
7. Vector length is decreased to 1 minute and ECS display is zoomed in to see more details.

Figure 222 Further decrease of vector length

8. By using the ERBL the user can easily determine the amount of escape action necessary to pass astern
of the target with the required safety margin (1.0 NM), i.e. 60 degrees to starboard. The TCPA Critical
parameter must reflect the maneuvering characteristics of the ship: VLCC will need more time to change
its course than a HSC.
Figure 223 Use of the ERBL tool to assess the maneuver

9. Own ship has now changed course so that it will pass astern the target at a slightly less distance than the
CPA limit.
Figure 224 The change of course by the own ship to avoid collision (CPA is close to the set CPA Limit)
10. It is important to maintain the evasive maneuver until the target has been passed (the TCPA value in the
Info Æ Targets Æ ARPA Targets tab is ‘unreachable’).
Figure 225 Evasive action is maintained until TCPA is unavailable

11. When the relative distance to the target is equal to, or less than, the CPA limit, the collision danger sector
disappears and the collision danger line only is displayed.
Figure 226 The distance to target is equal or less than the CPA limit – only collision danger line is displayed
12. The collision danger line disappears from the screen when the target’s closest point of approach has
been passed, i.e. the TCPA value in the Info Æ ARPA Targets Æ ARPA targets tab is ‘unreachable’.
Figure 227 The collision danger line disappears

13. The own ship can now change the course to come back to its original track line.
Figure 228 Own ship returns to its original course

9. OTHER NAVIGATIONAL TOOLS

9.1 Range and Bearing from Own Ship to Other Objects
9.1.1 ERBL
Electronic range and bearing line tool is intended for easy measuring of ranges and bearings between
objects in the chart view. With the tool you can measure ranges and bearings between the own ship and any
point in the chart view, as well as between any two points in the chart view; you can also fix a range as a
circle around the own ship to monitor objects within the range 68 .
To turn on the ERBL mode, press the ERBL button in the Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel
(to open the panel move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator). To turn the ERBL mode off, outpress
the ERBL button.
Figure 229 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel, ERBL button
To measure the range and bearing between the own ship and a point in the chart, do the following:
1. Turn the ERBL mode on. In the chart view, range and bearing indication lines will be displayed as orange
dashed lines. The ERBL center is in the own ship position.
2. Point the mouse pointer to any object in the chart view. The range and bearing to and from values are
displayed in the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view.
3. Turn the ERBL mode off.
To measure the range and bearing between any two points in the chart, do the following:
2. Point the mouse pointer to the first point and left-click: the ERBL center will be fixed in this point.
3. Point the mouse pointer to the second point. The range and bearing to and from values are displayed in
the mouse pointer range and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view.
4. To release the ERBL center, left-click in the chart view: the center will be fixed in the own ship position
again.
5. Turn the ERBL mode off 69 .
To fix a range around the own ship, do the following:
2. Measure the required distance from the own ship using the range and bearing indicators at the bottom of
the chart view and right-click. The range will be fixed around the own ship and will move as the own ship
moves.
68
Measurement units for ranges are set in the Config Æ Units and Time tab.
69
Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines. The calculation mode is set in the Check points panel
(see chapter 9.1.2, Check Points).

3. To release the ERBL, right-click in the chart view.
4. Turn the ERBL mode off.
9.1.2 Check Points
The check points functionality allows you setting up to three checkpoints. Check points are the points to
which the distance and bearing from the own ship are constantly displayed in the chart view. The values of
the distances and bearings are updated as the ship moves.
To set a check point, do the following:
1. Open the Check points panel: move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator to open the Scale and
Quick Access Buttons panel and press the Check points
button.
2. Choose whether the bearing from the own ship to check points should be
true (angle between the direction to the north and the direction to the
object) or relative (angle between the ship course and the direction to the
object). To set the true bearing, check the True/Relative checkbox to the
right from the check point name, to set the relative bearing, clear the
True/Relative checkbox.
3. Select the calculation mode for distances in the Calculation Mode drop-
down list: distances can be calculated as great circle arcs or as rhumb Figure 230 Check points
lines. panel
4. To plot a check point in the chart view, check one of the Check point checkboxes. The Check points
panel will close and the check points editing mode will turn on.
5. Plot the checkbox in the chart view: point the mouse pointer to the reference object and left-click. The
check point will be plotted in the chart view. The check point is connected with the own ship with a range
and bearing line. The values of the range and bearing are displayed in the range and bearing indicators
at the bottom of the chart view. The ‘T’ letter near the bearing value means true bearing and the ‘R’ letter
means relative bearing.
Figure 231 Control points in the chart view

6. To remove a check point, open the Check points panel and clear the checkbox corresponding to the
check point you want to remove. To remove all check points, press the Clear All button.
9.1.3 Range and Bearing to the Mouse Pointer
To turn on the display of the range and bearing from the own ship to the mouse pointer, open the Check
points panel and check the Cursor DIST/BRG checkbox. The range and bearing are displayed in the range
and bearing indicators at the bottom of the chart view 70 .
70
Ranges can be measured as great circle arcs or as rhumb lines. The calculation mode is set in the Check points panel
(see chapter 9.1.2, Check Points).

9.2 Man Overboard and Position Fix

9.2.1 Man Overboard Functionality
In case someone or something has fallen over board, you can use the Man Overboard functionality. Using
the functionality, you can plot a symbol in the accident position and monitor it as the own ship moves.
To use the MOB functionality, do the following:
1. Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel (move the mouse pointer
over the scale indicator) and press the MOB button. The Man
Overboard mode is turned on: a Man Overboard symbol is plotted in the
current own ship position and the position coordinates are recorded as a MOB
entry in the logbook. As the own ship sails, the range and bearing to the MOB
position are constantly updated and shown on the range and bearing line.
Figure 232 MOB
2. The MOB symbol is being updated until the MOB button is pressed. To stop symbol
updating the MOB position and delete the symbol outpress the MOB button.
9.2.2 Position Fix Functionality
The position fix functionality allows plotting a symbol in the own ship current position to mark this position.
To use the Position Fix functionality, do the following:
1. Open the Scale and Quick Access Buttons panel (move the mouse pointer over the scale indicator)
and press the Fix position button.

2. A Fix Position symbol is plotted in the current own ship position and the position object is added to the
mariner objects database (see chapter 6.2, Mariner Objects).
Figure 233 Fix symbol

9.3 Log Book
The ECDIS contains an automatic log book function. The log book records all events that occur during a
voyage as well as the own ship positions and configuration changes. The log book also has a playback
feature to allow a voyage to be recreated in a controlled environment.
Together with the main ship log book the ECDIS keeps the ship track log. The main log book contains
entries of all classes (System, Track, Voyage, User records, ARPA targets, and AIS targets), whereas the
track log only contains entries of the Track class. The difference between the main log and the track log is
that in the main log records Track entries at regular intervals, and the track log records all Track entries
coming from the primary and secondary position sources.
9.3.1 Viewing Log Book Entries
To view the log books, do the following:
1. Open the Log Book panel.
2. To view the main log press the Main Logbook toggle button, and to view the track log press the
Complete Track toggle button. Both logs share the same user interface. If there are differences in
functioning of an interface element for the main log and the track log, it will be mentioned in the element
description.

Figure 234 Log Book panel

3. Set the date and time period at which you want to view log book records: select the date in the Date
drop-down list and set the beginning time in the From field and the end time in the To field. By default
the log book is opened at the date that was viewed last. For example, to view today's log book, the date
has to be reset.
4. Set the time system for the time display: select the Ship’s Time or the UTC Time option in the drop-
down list to the right from the To field.
5. After the time has been set, log book entries for the specified date and time will be displayed in the
entries table. Every entry in the log book contains the following information:
• Class – Describes the type of information (see below);
• Level – Describes the importance of the entry: information, warning or alarm;
• Type – A general description of the entry (e.g. POS (Position), User Remark, Chart Scale and
Angle);
• Date – The date and time of the entry (UTC or Ship’s depending of the time system setting);
• Remark – Recorded information itself. It contains detailed information on what has been added to
the logbook: coordinates, course, echo sounder depth, etc;
6. To set a filter and display entries of selected classes only, check those entry classes you want to be
displayed. Select the classes in the classes list in the left part of the panel. In order to deselect a class
clear its checkbox. The option is not available for the track log. The record classes are the following:
• System – Changes made to the system configurations;
• Track – Logging position / changing chart scale;
• Voyage – Logging events when sailing a route;
• User records – Entry added by the operator;
• Targets – ARPA activity;
• AIS targets – AIS activity;
7. To refresh the log book data, press the Refresh button. Usually this is not required as the log book data
are refreshed automatically at regular intervals.
8. To add a remark, press the Add Remark button, the Add Remark window will open. Enter the remark in
the window and press the OK button. A User records class entry will be added to the log book. If you
add a user remark when the track log is on, it still will be added to the main log.
9. To scroll the chart view to the coordinates of a log book entry, select the entry in the entries table and
press the Go to position button. The position will be displayed in the center of the chart view and
marked with an arrow symbol. Please note that it is required that the selected log book entry had position
information in the remark field; otherwise an error message will appear.
10. To create a route using the current log book entries, press the Save as Route button. The Select Route
Name window will open: enter the route name to the Output Route Name field and press the OK button.

The route will be created and added to the existing routes. You can edit the route in the Route Æ Route
Planning tab 71 .
11. To print the log book out, press the Print button. The log book will be converted to the *.doc format and
opened in the Reach Text Editor (the program is installed together with ECDIS). Print the log book using
the Reach Text Editor printing functionality (File Æ Print).
12. Sometimes user remarks can be too long and not fit in the log book Remark field. To view the remark tip
when pointing the mouse pointer at the remark, check the Remark Hints checkbox.
13. To delete a log book page, press the Cleanup button, the Cleanup logbook window will open. In the
Cleanup logbook window, select pages you want to delete, press the Delete selected button and
confirm the operation. The selected log book pages will be deleted 72 .
14. To export a log book page to a file, display the page in the Log Book panel and press the Export button,
the Export day log book dialog will open. In the dialog, select the folder where to save the log book
page and press the OK button. In the selected folder a Logbook folder is created and the log book page
is saved to this folder. The log book page is saved as two files: the name of the files is the date of the
page and extensions are *.lbk and *.lbt.
Figure 235 Export day log book dialog

15. To import a log book page, press the Import button. The Import day log book dialog will open. In the
dialog, select the folder where the log book file is stored. In the pane next to the folder tree pane, the list
of all log book pages in the selected folder will be displayed. Select a page, press the OK button, and
confirm the operation. The log book page will be imported to the log book and available for display and
playback.
Figure 236 Import day log book dialog
71
This function creates a route from all the recorded own ship positions of the log book in view. Each point of the track
will become a waypoint in the created route. This may be useful in order to sail the same route later or to export the
route to another system. This function, when used in the track log, provides the possibility to set time interval for the
track points to be recorded to the route.
72
The page currently displayed in the Log Book panel cannot be deleted as well as pages for the day before and the
day after.

IMPORTANT!
Imported log book page overwrites the page with the same date.
9.3.2 Log Book Play-Back

Using the play-back functionality of the log book, you can view the log book entries animated in the chart
view.
To play-back the log book, do the following:
1. Open the Log Book panel.
Figure 237 Log Book panel, play-back controls

2. Open the log book page you want to play back. To do so, set the date and the time period at which the
data were recorded in the log book in the Data and the From and To fields.
3. Select the replay speed in the Replay speed drop-down list. The replay speed defines the time scale
during playing. For example, if the replay speed is x2, events will be replayed two times faster than they
happened in reality.
4. If you want the play-back to be cyclical, check the Cycle playback checkbox.
5. To start the play-back, press the Start Play Back button. After pressing the Start Play Back button and
confirming that you really want to switch the Playback Mode on, in the upper left corner of the chart area
a large letter ‘R’ (Replay) appears, informing you that you are in the Playback Mode. Also under the
Indicators panel a special Replay panel appears.
Figure 238 Replay panel

The chart window will display position and scale equal to those during sailing. Date and time
corresponding to the playback events are displayed in the Replay panel. In the right part of the panel,
position, course and speed of the own ship are shown. Position of the own ship on the chart also
corresponds to the replay time.
The buttons on the Replay panel are the following:
Play
If the Cycle playback checkbox is ticked, playback will be resumed from the first
record otherwise replay will be stopped after reaching the last record.
Stop
Step back/forward buttons allow viewing the ship's movement step by step.
To begin/To end buttons go to the first or last logbook record.
Switch playback off button switches the Playback Mode off. Pressing the button is

equal to releasing the Start Play Back button (in activated condition called Stop
Play Back) in the Log Book panel. The Replay panel will be removed from the
screen and in the chart window the current ship's position will be displayed.
9.4 Navi Calculator

The navigator’s calculator is an additional tool designed to help you in performing various geodetic tasks not
solved automatically by the ECDIS. The Navi Calculator performs the following tasks:
• inverse geodetic problem
• direct geodetic problem
• calculating great circle points
• converting coordinates from one datum to another
To solve the inverse geodetic problem, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Navi Calculator Æ Distance / Bearing tab.
Figure 239 Info Æ Navi Calculator tab, Distance/Bearing tab (for direct and inverse geodetic problems)
2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections. To show the line connecting the positions
with the specified coordinates in the chart view, press the Show button.
3. Select a measurement unit for Distance (Nautical Miles, Statute Miles or kilometers) in the drop-down
list near the Distance field.
4. Select the mode of calculation (Great Circle or Rhumb Line) in the Mode drop-down list.
5. Press the Distance / Bearing button.
6. The calculated values of distance and bearings to and from will be displayed in the Distance, Bearing
To and Bearing From fields.
7. To clear the calculator, press the Clear All button.
To solve the direct geodetic problem, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Navi Calculator Æ Distance / Bearing panel.
2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point section.
3. Enter the distance value in the Distance field and select a measurement unit for distance (nautical miles,
statute miles or kilometers) in the drop-down list to the right from the field.
4. Enter the Bearing to and Bearing from values.
5. Select the mode of calculation (Great Circle or Rhumb Line) in the Mode drop-down list.
6. Press the Calculate End Point button to calculate coordinates of the end point. The end point
coordinates will be displayed in the End Point section. To show the line connecting the start point and
the end point in the chart view, press the Show button.

To calculate great circle points, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Navi Calculator Æ Great Circle tab.
Figure 240 Info Æ Navi Calculator panel, Great Circle tab (for the great circle calculations)
2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point and End point sections. To show the line connecting the positions
with the specified coordinates in the chart view, press the Show button.
3. Select a measurement unit for the step distance (nautical miles, statute miles or kilometers) in the drop-
down list near the Step field.
4. Enter the distance value of the step in the Step field.
5. Press the Ortodromia Points button. Coordinates of the great circle points will be displayed as a list of
coordinates in the special list area.
To convert coordinates from one datum to another, do the following:
1. Open the Info Æ Navi Calculator Æ Datum Transformation tab.
Figure 241 Info Æ Navi Calculator tab, Datum Transformation tab

2. Enter coordinates in the Start Point section.
3. Select the original datum in the From Datum drop-down list.
4. Select the target datum in the To Datum drop-down list.
5. Press the Transform button and read converted coordinates in the End Point section. To view the line
connecting the start point and the end point, press the Show button.

APPENDIX A List of Input Sentences

The table below lists sentences which can be received and processed by the ECDIS and devices producing
the sentences.
Device Type Sentences Recommended sentences
Position device GLL; VTG; RMC; GGA, ZDA, DTM, GLL; VTG; ZDA, DTM
SGD, GNS
Gyro VHW, THS, HDT, HDM, HDG, ROT, THS, ROT

VDR
Speed Log VHW, VBW VBW
ARPA TTM, TLL TTM
AIS VDM, VDO, ABK VDM, VDO
Echo Sounder DBT, DPT DPT
Wind Sensor MWV MWV
Route Planner RTE, WPL RTE, WPL
¾ ABK – UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement

Standard: NMEA 0183 v.3, 2000 (not recommended for new designs)
The ABK-sentence is generated when a transaction, initiated by reception of an ABM, ACA, AIR, or BBM
sentence, is terminated. This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested ABM
broadcast of either ITU-R M.I 371 messages 6 or 12.
$--ABK, xxxxxxxxx1, x2, x.x3, x4, x5*hh<CR><LF>
No. Field Description Comments
1 xxxxxxxxx MMSI of the addressed AIS unit
2 x AIS channel of reception
3 x.x Message type
4 x Message sequence number
5 x Type of acknowledgement
¾ DBT – Depth Below Transducer

Standard: IEC 61162-1 Ed.3, 2007
Water depth referenced to the transducer.
$--DBT, x.x1, f2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, F6*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Depth value in feet
2 f Measurement unit: ‘f’ for feet
3 x.x Depth value in meters

4 M Measurement unit: ‘M’ for meters
5 x.x Depth value in fathoms not processed
6 F Measurement unit: F for fathoms not processed
¾ DPT – Depth
Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer. Positive offset numbers
provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline. Negative offset numbers provide the distance from
the transducer to the part of the keel of interest. For the ECDIS the offset is always negative so as to provide
depth relative to the keel.
$--DPT, x.x1, x.x2, x.x3*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Water depth relative to the transducer, in meters
2 x.x Offset from transducer, in meters (distance from transducer to

keel)
3 x.x Maximum range scale in use not processed
¾ DTM – Datum Reference

Local geodetic datum and datum offsets from a reference datum. This sentence is used to define the datum
to which a position location and geographic locations in subsequent sentences are referenced. Latitude,
longitude and altitude offsets from the reference datum, and the selection of the reference datum, are also
provided.
$--DTM,ccc1,a2,x.x3,a4,x.x5,a6, x.x7,ccc8*hh<CR><LF>
1 ccc Local datum
2 a Local datum subdivision code not processed
3 x.x Lat offset, min not processed
4 a N/S not processed
5 x.x Lon offset, min, not processed
6 a E/W not processed
7 x.x Altitude offset, m not processed
8 ccc Reference datum

¾ GGA – Global positioning system (GPS) fix data

Time, position and fix-related data for a GPS receiver.
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, x6, xx7, x.x8, x.x9, M10, x.x11,
M12, x.x13, xxxx14*hh<CR><LF>
1 hhmmss.ss UTC of position
2 llll.ll Latitude: degrees and minutes
3 a N/S
4 yyyyy.yy Longitude
5 a E/W
6 x GPS quality indicator
7 xx Number of satellites in use, 00-12, may be different from the not processed
number in view
8 x.x Horizontal dilution of precision not processed
9 x.x Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level (geoid) not processed
10 M Units of antenna altitude, meters not processed
11 x.x Geoidal separation: the difference between the WGS-84 earth not processed
ellipsoid surface and mean sea level (geoid) surface, “ – “ =
mean sea level surface below the WGS-84 ellipsoid surface.
12 M Units of geoidal separation, meters not processed
13 x.x Age of differential GPS data: time in seconds since last not processed
SC104 type 1 or 9 update, null field when DGPS is not used.
14 xxxx Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 not processed
¾ GLL – Geographic Position – Latitude/Longitude

Latitude and longitude of vessel position, time of position fix and status.
$--GLL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, hhmmss.ss5, A6, a7 *hh<CR><LF>
1 llll.ll Latitude
2 a N/S
4 a E/W

6 A Status: A=data valid; V=data invalid
7 a Mode indicator
¾ GNS – GNSS Fix Data

Fix data for single or combined satellite navigation systems (GNSS). This sentence provides fix data for
GPS, GLONASS, possible future satellite systems and systems combining these. This sentence could be
used with the talker identification of GP for GPS, GL for GLONASS, GN for GNSS combined systems, as
well as future identifiers. Some fields may be null fields for certain applications, as described below.
$-- GNS, hhmmss.ss1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, c—c6, xx7, x.x8, x.x9, x.x10,
x.x11, x.x12 *hh<CR><LF>
2 llll.ll Latitude: degrees and minutes
3 a N/S
5 a E/W
6 c—c Mode indicator
7 xx Total number of satellites in use, 00-99 not processed
8 x.x Horizontal dilution of precision not processed
9 x.x Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level (geoid), meters not processed
10 x.x Geoidal separation, meters not processed
11 x.x Age of differential data not processed
12 x.x Differential reference station ID not processed
¾ HDG – Heading, deviation and variation

IMO Resolution A.382 (X). Heading (magnetic sensor reading), which if corrected for deviation will produce
magnetic heading, which if offset by variation will provide true heading.
$--HDG, x.x1, x.x2, a3, x.x4, a5*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Magnetic sensor heading, degrees
2 x.x Magnetic deviation, degrees

3 a E/W
4 x.x Magnetic variation, degrees
5 a E/W
¾ HDM – Heading magnetic

Actual vessel heading in degrees magnetic.
$--HDM, x.x1, M2*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Magnetic heading, degrees
2 M Heading type: M for magnetic
¾ HDT – Heading true

Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading.
$--HDT, x.x1, T2*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x True heading, degrees
2 M Heading type: T for true
¾ MWV – Wind speed and angle

When the reference field is set to R (Relative), data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the
vessel's bow/centerline and the wind speed, both relative to the (moving) vessel. Also called apparent wind,
this is the wind speed as felt when standing on the (moving) ship.
When the reference field is set to T (Theoretical, calculated actual wind), data is provided giving the wind
angle in relation to the vessel's bow/centerline and the wind speed as if the vessel was stationary. On a
moving ship these data can be calculated by combining the measured relative wind with the vessel’s own
speed.
$--MWV, x.x1, a2, x.x3, a4, A5 *hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Wind angle, 0° to 359°
2 a Reference, R = relative, T = true
3 x.x Wind speed
4 a Wind speed units: K = km/h; M = m/s; N = knots
5 A Status: A = data valid; V= data invalid

¾ RMC – Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

Time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GNSS navigation receiver.
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss1, A2, llll.ll3, a4, yyyyy.yy5, a6, x.x7, x.x8, xxxxxx9, x.x10,
a11, a12*hh<CR><LF>
1 hhmmss.ss UTC of position fix
2 A Status: A = data valid; V = navigation receiver warning
3 llll.ll Latitude
4 a N/S
6 a E/W
7 x.x Speed over ground, knots
8 x.x Course over ground, degrees true
9 xxxxxx Date: dd/mm/yy
10 x.x Magnetic variation, degrees not processed
11 a E/W not processed
12 a Mode indicator
¾ ROT – Rate of turn

IMO Resolution A.526. Rate of turn and direction of turn.
$--ROT, x.x1, A2*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Rate of turn, °/min, "-" = bow turns to port
2 A Status: A = data valid; V = data invalid
¾ RTE – Routes
Waypoint identifiers, listed in order with starting waypoint first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transmission are provided: "c" indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted;
"w" indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been
reached (FROM), while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently
heading for (TO) and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route.
$--RTE, x.x1, x.x2, a3, c--c4, c--c5, ......6 c--c7*hh<CR><LF>

1 x.x Total number of messages being transmitted
2 x.x Message number
3 a Message mode
4 c--c Route identifier
5 c--c Waypoint identifier
6 …… Additional waypoint identifiers
7 c--c Waypoint "n" identifier
¾ SGD – Position accuracy estimate

Estimate of position accuracy based on geometric dilution of precision (GDOP) and system noise, in feet and
nautical miles.
Limited utility, no recommended replacement.
$--SGD, x.x1, N2, x.x3, f4*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Accuracy in nautical miles
2 N ‘N’ for nautical miles
3 x.x Accuracy in feet not processed
4 f ‘f’ for feet not processed
¾ THS – True heading and status

Actual vessel heading in degrees true produced by any device or system producing true heading. This
sentence includes a “mode indicator” field providing critical safety related information about the heading
data, and replaces the deprecated HDT sentence.
$--THS, x.x1, a2*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Heading, degrees true
2 a Mode indicator
¾ TLL – Target latitude and longitude

Target number, name, position and time tag for use in systems tracking targets.
$--TLL, xx1, llll.ll2, a3, yyyyy.yy4, a5, c--c6, hhmmss.ss7, a8, a9*hh<CR><LF>

1 xx Target number 00 – 99
2 llll.ll Target latitude
3 a N/S
4 yyyyy.yy Target longitude
5 a E/W
6 c--c Target name
7 hhmmss.ss UTC of data
8 a Target status: L = Lost, tracked target has been lost;

Q = Query, target in the process of acquisition; T = tracking
9 a Reference target = R, null otherwise
¾ TTM – Tracked target message

IMO Resolution A.820:1995 and MSC 64(67) Annex 4: Data associated with a tracked target relative to own
ship's position.
$--TTM, xx1, x.x2, x.x3, a4, x.x5, x.x6, a7, x.x8, x.x9, a10, c--c11, a12, a13,
hhmmss.ss14, a15 *hh<CR><LF>
1 xx Target number, 00 to 99
2 x.x Target distance from own ship
3 x.x Bearing from own ship, degrees
4 a true/relative (T/R)
5 x.x Target speed
6 x.x Target course, degrees
7 a true/relative (T/R)
8 x.x Distance of closest-point-of-approach
9 x.x Time to CPA, min., "-" increasing
10 a Speed/distance units, K/N/S
11 c--c Target name

12 a Target status: L = Lost, tracked target has been lost;

Q = Query, target in the process of acquisition; T = Tracking
13 a Reference target = R, null otherwise
14 hhmmss.ss Time of data (UTC)
15 a Type of acquisition
¾ VBW – Dual ground/water speed

Water-referenced and ground-referenced speed data.
$--VBW, x.x1, x.x2, A3, x.x4, x.x5, A6, x.x7, A8, x.x9, A10*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Longitudinal water speed ("-" = astern), knots
2 x.x Transverse water speed ("-" = port), knots not processed
3 A Status, water speed: A = data valid, V = data invalid
4 x.x Longitudinal ground speed ("-" = astern), knots
5 x.x Transverse ground speed ("-" = port), knots not processed
6 A Status, ground speed: A = data valid, V = data invalid not processed
7 x.x Stern transverse water speed ("-" = port), knots not processed
8 A Status, stern water speed: A = data valid, V = data invalid not processed
9 x.x Stern transverse ground speed ("-" = port), knots not processed
10 A Status, transverse ground speed: A = data valid, V = data not processed

invalid
¾ VDM – AIS VHF data-link message

This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of a received AIS message packet, as defined in ITU-R
M.1371 and as received on the VHF Data Link (VDL), using the “six-bit” field type. The structure provides for
the transfer of long binary messages by using multiple sentences.
Data messages should be transmitted in as few sentences as possible. When a data message can be
accommodated in a single sentence, then it shall not be split.
!--VDM, x1, x2, x3, a4, s—s5, x6*hh<CR><LF>
1 x Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1

to 9
2 x Sentence number, 1 to 9
3 x Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9

4 a AIS channel
5 s—s Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message
6 x Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
¾ VDO – AIS VHF data-link own-vessel report

This sentence is used to transfer the entire contents of an AIS unit’s broadcast message packet, as defined
in ITU-R M.1371 and as sent out by the AIS unit over the VHF data link (VDL) using the “six-bit” field type.
The sentence uses the same structure as the VDM sentence formatter.
!--VDO, x1, x2, x3, a4, s—s5, x6*hh<CR><LF>
1 x Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1

to 9
2 x Sentence number, 1 to 9
3 x Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4 a AIS channel
5 s—s Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message
6 x Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
¾ VDR – Set and drift

The direction towards which a current flows (set) and speed (drift) of a current.
$--VDR, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Direction, degrees true
2 T ‘T’ for true
3 x.x Direction, degrees magnetic not processed
4 M ‘M’ for magnetic not processed
5 x.x Current speed in knots
6 N ‘N’ for knots
¾ VHW – Water speed and heading

The compass heading to which the vessel points and the speed of the vessel relative to the water.
$--VHW, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, K8*hh<CR><LF>

1 x.x Heading, degrees true not processed for

speed log
2 T ‘T’ for true not processed for

speed log
3 x.x Heading, degrees magnetic not processed for

speed log
4 M ‘M’ for magnetic not processed for

speed log
5 x.x Current speed in knots not processed for

gyroscope
6 N ‘N’ for knots not processed for

gyroscope
7 x.x Current speed in km/h not processed
8 K ‘K’ for km/h not processed
¾ VTG – Course over ground and ground speed

The actual course and speed relative to the ground.
$--VTG, x.x1, T2, x.x3, M4, x.x5, N6, x.x7, K8, a9*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Course over ground, degrees true
2 T ‘T’ for true
3 x.x Course over ground, degrees magnetic
4 M ‘M’ for magnetic
5 x.x Speed over ground, knots
6 N ‘N’ for knots
7 x.x Speed over ground, km/h
8 K ‘K’ for km/h
9 a Mode indicator

¾ WPL – Waypoint location

Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint.
$--WPL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, c--c5*hh<CR><LF>
1 llll.ll Waypoint latitude, N/S
2 a N/S
3 yyyyy.yy Waypoint longitude, E/W
4 a E/W
¾ ZDA – Time and date

UTC, day, month, year and local time zone.
$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss1, xx2, xx3, xxxx4, xx5, xx6*hh<CR><LF>
1 hhmmss.ss UTC time
2 xx Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)
3 xx Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)
4 xxxx Year (UTC)
5 xx Local zone hours, 00 h to ±13 h not processed
6 xx Local zone minutes, 00 to +59 not processed

APPENDIX B List of Output Sentences

The table below lists sentences which can be transmitted by the ECDIS and devices for which the sentences
are intended.
Device Type Sentences
Route Planner RTE, WPL
¾ RTE – Routes
Waypoint identifiers, listed in order with starting waypoint first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transmission are provided: "c" indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted;
"w" indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been
reached (FROM), while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently
heading for (TO) and the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route.
$--RTE, x.x1, x.x2, a3, c--c4, c--c5, ......6 c--c7*hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Total number of messages being transmitted
2 x.x Message number
3 a Message mode
4 c--c Route identifier
6 …… Additional waypoint identifiers
7 c--c Waypoint "n" identifier
¾ WPL – Waypoint location

Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint.
$--WPL, llll.ll1, a2, yyyyy.yy3, a4, c--c5*hh<CR><LF>
1 llll.ll Waypoint latitude, N/S
2 a N/S
3 yyyyy.yy Waypoint longitude, E/W
4 a E/W

APPENDIX C Algorithm and Examples of Manual Position Fix by

Range and Bearing LOPs
¾ Algorithm
All measurements are assumed as corrected by systematic device errors (device description table allow
modification of this corrections).
All measurements are assumed as containing not correlated random errors (Gaussian distribution with 0
mean value and RMS retrieved from device description table).
All Lines of Position are assumed as Geodetic lines on the reference-ellipsoid (now fixed to WGS 84).
Calculations on the ellipsoid use internal algorithm from dKart library.
A position FLa = (λ, φ) is needed for the algorithm. Initial position is usually received from dead reckoning.
Start position covariance matrix Ba is 2x2 diagonal with values for latitude and longitude covariance equal to
10000 m RMS value. This makes no affect of a priory given position to the resulting estimated position.
The iteration calculates as well known minimum RMS
dFL=1/(1/Ba + H'(1/B)H) H'(1/B) dZ (1)
FL=FLa+Cp dFL (2)
where
dFL = [dLat dLon] position tranfser vector;
B is NxN (N - number of LOPs) diagonal matrix with diagonal element Bii = RMSd * RMSd for distance
measurements and Bjj = RMSbrg * RMSbrg * Drp *Drp; RMSd is a RMS of distance measurements
assumed as increasing on more distances in not a linear function; RMSbrg is a bearing measurement error
(radians) Drp - calculated from given position distance to reference point;
H is a gradient matrix 2xN dimension with elements calculated as differentials of the LOP parameter by
corresponded coordinate Lat or Lon;
dZ is a difference vector N - size with element (LOP calculated - LOP measured)
Cp is a 2x2 matrix of the Latitude and Longitude effective radius calculated in the FL position.
¾ Measurements aging
When the positioning system (for example Navstar GPS) is used continuously and manual observation is for
check the position by another than GPS data the aging is not applied to LOP measurements taken in
different time. In the Dead Reckoning mode we assume that Speed Over Ground error SOGerr affects to the
aged measurements in SOGerr * DeltaT / D * sin ( BRG - COG ) for bearing measurements covariance and
SOGerr * DeltaT * cos ( BRG - COG ) for distance measurements.

¾ Common examples of manual LOP fixes based on 3 bearing lines

1. Three reference points with bearing differences of 120° equally distant from the dead reckoning position
of the own ship
Figure 242 Three reference points, bearing difference is 120°, equally distant from DR position
a. If the time of measurements is the same, lines of position are equally accurate; the observed
position is in the center of the error figure, and the figure is a circle
Figure 243 Observed position in the center of the error figure

b. If the time of measurement is different, lines of position are not equally accurate anymore due to
measurement aging. For example, if one LOP was measured earlier than the other two, the
observed position moves to the intersection of the later measured LOPs.
Figure 244 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs measured later
2. Three reference points with bearing difference of 120°, two reference points are equally distant from the
dead reckoning position of the own ship, distance to the 3rd reference point is twice as long as to the first
two, time of measurement is the same
Figure 245 Three reference points, bearing difference is 120°, one reference point is at a double distance
from DR position than the other two

The observed position moves to the intersection of the more accurate LOPs; the accuracy ellipse major
axis is perpendicular to the less accurate LOP.
Figure 246 Observed position near the intersection of the more accurate LOPs
3. Two of the three reference points equally distant from the dead reckoning position of the own ship have a
small difference between bearings
Figure 247 Three reference points, equally distant from DR position, small angle between bearing lines of
two points

The observed position is situated near the intersection of LOPs with the angle between them closer to
90°; the accuracy ellipse major axis is aligned with LOPs intersecting at a smaller angle.
Figure 248 Observed position near the intersection of LOPs with the angle closer to 90°

Glossary
Activated AIS target Bearing (BRG)
A target activated for the display of additional The angle between the direction of the boat and
graphically presented information (for example, the reference direction expressed in degrees, with
heading line, velocity vector, etc.) a notation of True or Magnetic Variation (T or M).
Due north corresponds to 0 degrees, east to 90,
Aids to Navigation
south to 180 and west to 270. For compass
Usually pertains to buoys, ranges and the like. bearings, the reference direction is magnetic
North. For true bearings the reference direction is
AIS true North.
See Automatic Identification System. Bearing from Ship to Cursor
ARPA This data is an aid in route making and planning.
See Automatic Radar Plotting Aid. Bering from ship to cursor is expressed in
degrees, with a notation of True or Magnetic
Automatic Identification System (AIS) Variation.
AIS provides a means of broadcasting digitally Bookmark
navigation information including ship
position/speed/heading/dimension/name/destinati A saved combination of chart selection, zoom
on/ROT, aids to navigation, base station reports level and position on the chart. Created with the
and more. Created by the IMO and sanctioned by Set Bookmark command, it may be returned to at
the U.S. Coast Guard for ship monitoring and any time with the Go to Bookmark command.
collision avoidance. It is used by ship traffic
Bow
monitoring and control locations throughout the
world to improve situational awareness and help The front of a ship
prevent collisions at sea.
Broadcast Notice to Mariner (BNM)
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA)
See Local Notice to Mariners (LNM).
The functionality entailing the detection of moving
Cartesian Coordinates
targets and calculating their speed and course.
Used to automatically detect radar targets and Also known as "Rectangular Coordinates". A two-
output to other devices, ARPA is a collision dimensional plane contains an x-axis and a y-axis.
avoidance system. Negative x coordinates lay to the left of the y-axis
and positive x-coordinates to the right. Negative y
Autopilot
coordinates lay below the x-axis and positive
A self-steering device which attaches to a ship’s above the x-axis.
steering mechanism to control the ship’s bearing.
Chart
Azimuth
Nautical term for maps used in nautical navigation
Azimuth of a body is the arc of the horizon that show the depth of waters as well as land
intercepted between the North or South point and boundaries and other obstructions. Charts may be
the foot of the vertical circle passing through the paper or electronic and electronic charts may be
body. It is reckoned in degrees from either the of raster or vector type.
North or South point clockwise entirely around the
Chart License
Horizon. (source: Our Restless Tides).
Chart Licenses unlock a Chart region. Each
Bathymetric
license is made up of 16 digits laid out in the
Measurement of the depth, contours and slopes of following convention: 1234-1234-1234-1234
the floor of a body of water (sea, lake, ocean or
Closest Point of Approach (CPA)
river), obtained through topographic charting.
Predicted closest point a maneuvering boat will
Beam
get relative to any target, moving or otherwise,
Ship width. located at a point on the relative movement line
perpendicular to the reference ship. The minimum
horizontal distance between two crafts during a
close proximity encounter.
COG
See Course Over Ground.

COM Port DGPS (Differential GPS)
The interface through which the ECDIS can A network of 60 radio beacons in conjunction with
communicate with peripherals. Visual series a GPS that sends correction information used to
support 32 COM Ports. reduce positional error to the 1-3 meter range.
Course Digital Selective Calling (DSC)
The direction a boat is being steered. A type of VHF radio that allows boats to contact
other, similarly equipped boats using that boat’s
Course Over Ground (COG)
MMSI Number. DSC allows two radios to
Is the track of the ship over the ground and is communicate selectively with each other while
based on position changes. excluding other receivers from using the signal.
DSC can report position information.
CPA
Display Base
See Closest Point of Approach
Level of information which cannot be removed
Cross Track Error (XTE) from the ECDIS display, consisting of information
The distance of a perpendicular line drawn from which is required at all times in all geographic
the ship to an active route leg. Determines how areas and all circumstances. It is not intended to
much the ship is straying from the course of a be sufficient for safe navigation.
Route.
Display Scale
Current Ratio between a distance on the display and a
The flow of water characterized by direction and distance on the ground, normalized and
speed. Current speed and direction may change expressed as, for example 1:10 000.
with the tide.
Dongle
See also Ebb Current and Flood Current. Small hardware device that unlocks the ECDIS.
Dangerous Target Dongle Number
Tracked radar or reported AIS target with a Similar to the Serial Number, a Dongle Number is
predicted CPA and TCPA that violates values
attached to the Dongle, made up of 20 digits in
preset by the user. The respective target is the following convention: 1234-123456-1234-
marked by a “dangerous target” symbol 123456
Data Sentence
DR
The unit of information sent between peripherals
See Dead Reckoning.
and the ECDIS, conforming to the NMEA 0183
specification. Draft
Dead-reckoned Position The extent to which a boat protrudes into water.
The draft of a boat may vary due to changes in
DR position extrapolated from the last accepted
weight and changes in water salinity.
position update, based on present course and
speed. Drift
Dead Reckoning The cumulative effect of wind and current on the
ship.
A method of navigation where known values
(position, course, speed, time and distance to DSC
travel) are used to calculate unknown values.
See Digital Selective Calling.
Values such as set and drift can also be
incorporated. Ebb Current (Ebb)
Deviation Movement of tidal current away from shore or
down a tidal river or estuary.
Changes in the magnetic field due to the ferrous
composition of surrounding objects affecting the Echo Sounder
measured direction of magnetic North. Deviation
See Sounder.
is measured as the angular difference in direction
between the actual magnetic heading and the
compass heading.

Electronic Chart Display and Information Global Positioning System (GPS)
System (ECDIS)
A worldwide radio-navigation system developed
A hardware/software/data marine navigation by the US Department of Defense. In addition to
system that meets the specifications of the military purposes it is widely used in marine,
International Hydrographic Organization (IHO). An terrestrial navigation and location based services.
ECDIS is the only electronic system allowed to Uses stationary satellites or a surface signal to
replace paper charts under the International locate the ship with a very high degree of
Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS). accuracy. The term GPS is frequently used to
refer to GPS receivers.
Electronic Chart System (ECS)
GPS
A system comprised of:
See Global Positioning System.
navigation software
Great Circle
navigation data
A Great Circle is the shortest distance between
system hardware
two points on a spheroid. A great circle is formed
An ECS is any combination of hardware and at the edge of a plane crossing through the center
software that displays marine charts electronically. of a sphere. Unlike Rhumb Lines, great circles
The term ECS is used specifically when ECDIS generally do not have constant bearing (the
specifications are not met by the equator and the meridians are prominent
software/hardware system. exceptions).
Electronic Navigation Chart (ENC) Greenwich Meridian
An electronic data file containing information that See Prime Meridian.
could be used to display a chart. The ENC
GRIB (Gridded Binary)
contains all the chart information necessary for
safe navigation and may contain supplementary A general purpose, bit-oriented data exchange
information in addition to that contained in the format, GRIB is an efficient vehicle for transmitting
paper chart (for example sailing directions) which large volumes of gridded data over high-speed
may be considered necessary for safe navigation. telecommunication lines using modern protocols.
GRIB weather communicates large weather data
EP
files efficiently.
See Estimated Position.
Heading
Estimated Position
The direction the ship is oriented.
Position of own ship determined by the common
High Water (HW)
intersection of two LOPs.
The maximum height reached by a rising tide.
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Higher High Water (HHW)
The calculated arrival time to an active waypoint,
assuming no change in present course and speed The highest of the high water (or single high
or weather conditions. This time is based on water) of any specified tidal day due to the
computer clock time. For greatest accuracy, make declinational effects of the Mood and the Sun.
sure computer clock is synchronized with real
Higher Low Water (HLW)
time.
The highest of the low water of any specified tidal
Fish Finder
day do to the declinational effects of the Moon
See Sounder. and the Sun.
Fix International Hydrographic Organization (IHO)
Position of own ship determined, without An organization that provides the specifications
reference to any former position, by the common for what qualifies as an ECDIS.
intersection of three or more LOPs.
Knot (Kt)
Flood Current (Flood)
A speed unit of one international nautical mile
The movement of tidal current up the shore or up (18520.0 meters or 6,076.11549 international feet)
a tidal river or estuary. per hour.
Geo-reference
To establish the relationship between page
coordinates on a planar map and real-world
coordinates.
Latitude Magnetic Variation
The designation for angles measuring how far The degree to which the magnetic north differs
North or how far South a position is. Value range from the true north. This data is available from the
is from 90ºS to 0º at the equator to 90ºN. Latitude Current Chart indicator.
values are represented by the Greek letter lambda
Man Overboard (MOB)
(λ).
Mark that can be placed on a digital chart to
Lat/Lon
indicate emergency location. The ECDIS will track
Any object’s position, expressed in Latitude and that location to aid in returning the boat to MOB
Longitude. coordinates.
Leg Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI)
The segment of a route between two waypoints. MMSI Numbers are a series of nine digits
transmitted over a DSC radio path in order to
Line of Position
uniquely identify ship stations, ship earth stations,
Plotted line on which own ship is located coast stations, coast earth stations and group
determined by observation or measurement of the calls. These identities can be used by telephone
range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other and telex subscribers connected to the general
charted element. telecommunications network principally to call
ships automatically.
Log
Mean High Water (MHW)
A record of the ship’s movements and a place for
manual text entries. A tidal datum. The average of the higher high
water heights observed over the National Tidal
Longitude Datum Epoch.
The designation for angles measuring how far
Mean Higher High Water (MHHW)
West or how far East a position is. Value range is
from 180ºE to 180ºW. Values of longitude are A tidal datum. The average of all the high water
represented with the Greek letter phi (φ). heights of each tidal day observed over the
National Tidal Datum Epoch.
LOP
Mean Low Water (MLW)
See Line of Position.
A tidal datum. The average of all the low water
LORAN (LOng Range Aid to Navigation) heights observed over the National Tidal Datum
LORAN is a terrestrial-based navigation system Epoch.
using the time interval between radio signals to
Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW)
determine the position of the receiver. LORAN
was popular with marine navigation prior to the A tidal datum. The average of the lower low water
existence of GPS. The current version of LORAN height of each tidal day observed over the
in use is LORAN-C. LORAN fails under different National Tidal Datum Epoch.
conditions than GPS, arguably making it a
Mercator Projection
complementary radio-navigation system.
The Mercator projection is a conformal projection
Lost Target
devised by Gerhardus Mercator in 1569. Similar to
Tracked radar or reported AIS target for which the a cylindrical projection in that the horizontal and
system is no longer receiving valid position data. vertical distances are stretched towards the poles.
The target is represented by a “lost target” Unlike the cylindrical projection the vertical and
symbol. horizontal stretching of the chart preserves shape
and direction. Due to increasing distortion towards
Low Water the poles Mercator charts are not very useful for
The minimum height reached by a falling tide. representing cartographic information towards the
poles.
Lower High Water (LHW)
Lines of latitude and longitude are straight lines on
The lowest of the high waters of any specified the Mercator projection.
tidal day due to the declinational effects of the
Moon and the Sun. On Mercator charts, rhumb lines can be drawn as
straight lines because the Mercator projection
Lower Low Water (LLW) preserves bearing.
The lowest of the low waters (or single low water) MMSI
of any specified tidal day due to the declinational
effects of the Moon and Sun. See Maritime Mobile Service Identity.

MOB Polyconic Projection
See Man Overboard. The polyconic projection involves projecting the
surface of the Earth onto a series of cones
National Marine Electronics Association
situated with their apexes over the poles.
(NMEA)
Port
This organization has determined a standard,
0183, to which all data transmission to and from Port designates the left side of a boat as seen
marine peripherals must conform. The NMEA standing on the deck facing toward the bow. Port
issues standards for interfacing marine electronics side is indicated with a red light.
devices. Pronounced "nee-ma". Not to be
Prediction Vector
confused with NEMA (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association). A vector displayed in front of the vessel showing
where the boat will be after a specified period of
Computers directly connected to NMEA producing
time, assuming no intervening heading or speed
devices (GPS, heading sensor, etc). receive raw
changes.
NMEA data. This data conforms to the NMEA
0183 (3.01) specification. Prime Meridian
See also NMEA 0183 and NMEA 2000. The meridian of longitude which passes through
the original site of the Royal Observatory in
NMEA
Greenwich and used as the origin of Longitude.
See National Marine Electronics Association. Also known as the Greenwich Meridian.
NMEA 0183 RADAR (RAdio Distancing And Ranging)
NMEA 0183 defines the electrical interface and Microwave pulses used to detect objects (usually
data protocol for communications between marine metallic) based on wave reflection.
instrumentation. Many times referred to as
Radio Technical Commission for Maritime
"NMEA" in the context of marine instrumentation
Services (RTCM)
communications.
In the United States, the Federal Communications
NMEA 2000
Commission (FCC) and U.S. Coast Guard use
This standard contains the requirements for a RTCM standards to specify radar systems,
serial data communications network to inter- Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons
connect marine electronic equipment on ships. It and the basic version of Digital Selective Calling
is multi-master and self configuring and there is (DSC) radios.
no central network controller. Equipment designed
Range
to this standard will have the ability to share data,
including commands and status with other The distance between two specified points,
compatible equipment over a single channel. usually the ship and a mark.
(source: http://www.nmea.org/pub/2000/)
Range from Ship to Cursor
NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric
The distance between the ship icon and the
Administration)
cursor.
NOAA is a federal agency focused on the
conditions of the oceans and the atmosphere. Raster Chart
NOAA supplies navigation chart information for Charts where the chart information is stored as a
the coastal U.S. and the Great Lakes region. rasterized image. Examples are raster charts are
Raster Plus (RPL), BSB and GeoTIFF. Rasters
Overscale
are the scanned images of the original paper
Display of the chart information at a display scale chart.
larger than the compilation scale. Overscaling
may arise from deliberate overscaling by the Rate Of Turn (ROT)
mariner, or from automatic overscaling by ECDIS The speed at which heading is changing.
in compiling a display when the data included is at
various scales.
Pan
To move the view window over the chart. (Also
called Scrolling).
Past Track
An onscreen and/or logged record of a ship’s
previous movements.
Rhumb Line SOG
A Rhumb Line is a line of constant bearing. Unlike See Speed Over Ground.
great circles, rhumb lines are usually not the
Sounder (also known as Fish Finder or Echo
shortest path between two points on a sphere.
Sounder)
Part of the utility of rhumb lines is that they can be
drawn as straight lines on Mercator projections. A Sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect the
Rhumb lines have the advantage of being easy to distance to the sea floor, calculating the time
navigate because they follow a constant bearing. interval between signal transmission and the
The parallels of the earth are examples of rhumb detected reflected signal.
lines. Rhumb lines are undefined values at the
poles. Source Scale
The original scale of a paper chart from which an
A rhumb line of sufficient length will usually tend
electronic chart is derived.
to spiral around the earth towards a pole forming
a loxodrome. Such spiraling rhumb lines will form Standard Display
a logarithmic spiral on a polar stereographic
projection. Level of information that should be shown when a
chart is first displayed on ECDIS. The level of the
ROT information it provides for route planning or route
monitoring may be modified by the user according
See Rate Of Turn.
to the user's needs.
Route
STW
Desired path of travel, created on a chart or grid
and consisting of starting, ending and any number See Speed Through Water.
of interim waypoints. The ECDIS can instruct a Speed Over Ground (SOG)
properly connected autopilot to steer along the
path of a Route. SOG is the actual, fixed, geographic speed of a
ship over the earth’s surface. It is essentially the
Scale Speed Through Water (STW), plus the cumulative
effect of wind and current.
See Zoom.
Speed Through Water (STW)
Scroll
STW is the relative speed of the vessel over water
To move different parts of a long list into view,
surface. See also Speed Over Ground (SOG).
using the arrow buttons or scroll bar. Also, scroll is
often used as a synonym for pan. Starboard
Selected Target Starboard designates the right side of the boat as
seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow.
Target selected manually or automatically for the
Starboard side is indicated with a green light.
display of detailed alphanumeric data, information
and text in a separate user dialogue area. The Stern
target is represented by a “selected target”
symbol. The rear of a ship.
SENC System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC)
See System Electronic Navigational Chart. A database in the manufacturer’s internal ECDIS
format, resulting from the lossless transformation
Set of the entire ENC contents and updates. It is this
database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for
The cumulative effect of wind and current on the
the display generation and other navigational
direction of a ship.
functions, and is the equivalent of an up-to-date
Slack Water (Slack) paper chart. The SENC may also contain
information added by the mariner and information
The state of a tidal current when its speed is hear
from other sources.
zero, especially the moment when a current
changes direction and its speed is zero. Target
Sleeping AIS Target In nautical terminology, a target is generally an
obstacle or object in or near the water to avoid for
AIS target indicating the presence of a vessel
the purpose of safe navigation.
equipped with AIS in a certain location. The target
is represented by a “sleeping target” symbol TCPA
indicating the vessel’s orientation. No additional
information is presented until the AIS target is See Time to Closest Point of Approach.
activated.

Tidal Currents Variable Range Marker (VRM)
Tidal currents (a horizontal motion) are a result of Term describing a circle around the boat. When
the rise and fall of the water level due to tides (a enabled, the VRM can be manually manipulated
vertical motion). The effects of tidal currents on to change the radius.
the movement of water in and out of bays and
Variation
harbors can be substantial.
Also known as Magnetic Variation and
See Neap Tides.
Declination. The angular difference in direction
Tide between true North and magnetic North.
The change in ocean levels due to gravitational Vector Chart
influences external to the Earth. Formulas for
A chart where chart information is stored in terms
calculating tides can be found in tide and current
of points, lines and polygons. NCX and TX-97
tables provided by NOAA and the British
charts are vector chart formats.
Admiralty.
Velocity Made Good (VMG)
Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA)
The speed at which the boat is moving towards its
This is the time remaining until the closest point of
intended destination, regardless of the ship’s
approach of a target.
direction.
Time To Go (TTG)
Vertical Datum
The amount of time estimated until the ship
For marine applications, a base elevation used as
reaches an active waypoint, assuming no
a reference from which to reckon heights or
intervening change in course or speed. Displayed
depths. It is called a tidal datum when defined in
in hours and minutes.
terms of a certain phase of the tide. Tidal datums
TTG are local datums and should not be extended into
areas which have differing hydrographic
See Time To Go.
characteristics without substantiating
Universal Transverse Mercator Projection measurements. In order that they may be
(UTM) recovered when needed, such datums are
referenced to fixed points known as bench marks.
UTM is similar to the Mercator projection except (source: Our Restless Tides).
the projecting cylinder is mapped transverse to
the meridians and the Mercator projection used is VMG
a secant variation where the map scale to nominal
See Velocity Made Good.
scale is 0.9996.
VRM
The UTM segments the earth into 60 six degrees
of longitude wide zones where the cylinder is See Variable Range Marker.
oriented along the central meridian of a zone. The
Waypoint
zones extend from 84ºN to 80ºS. The sixty zones
start 180 degrees east and proceed eastward. A mark of which routes are made. The ship, when
The usage of zones allows the UTM projection to following a route, steers by successive waypoints.
be used over the entirety of the Earth while
minimizing distortion towards the poles. XTE
User-added Electronic Chart Information See Cross Track Error.
Electronic chart information manually entered by Zoom

the user for presentation (for example, To change the apparent scale of a chart in the
navigational notes, safety zones of interest, local chart view.
notices to mariners, etc.)

Abbreviations
ACK ENC
Acknowledgement Electronic Navigation Chart
AIS EP
Automatic identification system Estimated position
ARPA ERBL
Automatic radar plotting aid Electronic range and bearing line
BRG ETA
Bearing Estimated Time of Arrival
BTW ETD
Bearing to Waypoint Estimated Time of Departure
BWW GC
Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint Great Circle
COG GMDSS
Course Over the Ground Global maritime distress and safety system
CP GLONASS
Control Point Global Navigation Satellite System
CPA GPS
Closest point of approach Global Positioning System
CS GRIB
Conning Station GRIdded Binary
DGPS HDG
Differential Global Positioning System Heading
D, DIST HO
Distance Hydrographic office
DPT IHO
Depth International Hydrographic Organization
DR IMO
Dead reckoning International Maritime Organization
DTG LAT
Distance to Go Latitude
DWP LOC
Distance to Next Waypoint Local Mean Time
E LON
East Longitude
ECDIS LOP
Electronic Chart Display and Information System Line of Position
ECMWF MMSI
European Centre for Medium-Range Weather Maritime Mobile Service Identities
Forecasts
MOB
Man Overboard

N SOLAS
North Safety of life at sea
N/A SPD
Not Available Speed
NAVTEX STW
Navigational Telex Speed through Water
NMEA TCPA
National Marine Electronics Association Time to Closest Point of Approach
NOAA TM
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration True motion
RAD TTA
Radius Time to Arrival
RL TTG
Rhumb Line Time to Go
RM UTC
Relative motion Universal Time, Coordinated.
RMS VRM
Root Mean Square Variable range marker
ROT W
Rate of turn West
S WOL
South Wheel Over Line.
SAR WOP
Search and Rescue Wheel Over Point
SENC WP, WPT
System Electronic Navigational Chart Waypoint
SOG
Speed Over the Ground

Page Index
3D window.......................................................................... 45 charts display
add manual update............................................................... 59 3D window ......................................................................45
add manual update from NtM ............................................. 61 bookmarks .......................................................................43
additional chart data ............................................................ 50 chart legend .....................................................................43
additional chart windows depth areas setup .............................................................51
3D window ..................................................................... 45 depth settings...................................................................52
look-ahead window......................................................... 44 look-ahead window .........................................................44
AIS objects information.......................................................... 43
targets data .................................................................... 139 printing chart ...................................................................55
targets display ............................................................... 142 scale.................................................................................41
AIS lost alarm ................................................................... 133 scroll around....................................................................40
AIS targets indicator............................................................ 11 setup ................................................See chart display setup
alarm conditions list .......................................................... 134 supplementary data..........................................................50
alarms text settings ..................................................................... 53
AIS lost ......................................................................... 133 check points .......................................................................170
alarms panel .................................................................. 131 coastal weather download....................................................91
antigrounding................................................................ 132 color differentiation test.......................................................22
ARPA lost..................................................................... 133 conning station position .......................................................20
conditions list................................................................ 134 convert coordinates............................................................176
depth ............................................................................. 133 coordinates, convert...........................................................176
warnings panel .............................................................. 131 copy user permit to file ........................................................35
alarms indicator................................................................... 12 create mariner object............................................................64
anemometer....................................................................... 126 critical points .......................................................................77
anti-collision display custom weather download ...................................................93
collision risk indication................................................. 160 cyclones display................................................................. 104
configuration................................................................. 158 danger objects guard zone..................................................132
graphic elements ........................................................... 158 dangers and cautions indicator.............................................11
limits violation indication ............................................. 159 data display type indicator ...................................................10
theory ............................................................................ 150 data management
antigrounding alarm .......................................................... 132 database display ..............................................................29
ARPA database installation ........................................................28
targets data .................................................................... 146 ENC S-57 data...................................... See ENC S-57 data
targets display ............................................................... 147 licensing data...................................................................30
ARPA lost alarm ............................................................... 133 new version of database ..................................................33
ARPA targets display indicator ........................................... 11 data synchronization
astronomical information .................................................... 84 indicator ..........................................................................26
automatic chart updating ..................................................... 56 monitor ............................................................................ 24
automatic route planning..................................................... 69 routes...............................................................................26
best scale mode ................................................................. 127 setup ................................................................................23
black-adjust symbol ............................................................ 22 dead reckoning...................................................................117
bookmarks........................................................................... 43 depth alarms.......................................................................133
calculate great circle points ............................................... 176 depth areas setup..................................................................51
cell permits deep contour ....................................................................51
apply ............................................................................... 35 safety depth .....................................................................51
list ................................................................................... 36 shallow contour ...............................................................51
uninstall .......................................................................... 36 depth settings .......................................................................52
chart boundaries by scale level............................................ 68 devices precise location onboard .........................................19
chart display palettes ......................................................... 128 direct geodetic problem .....................................................175
chart display setup display of AIS targets ........................................................142
chart presentation models ............................................... 47 display of light sectors .......................................................129
display type..................................................................... 48 display palettes ..................................................................128
chart legend ......................................................................... 43 display type..........................................................................48
chart navigational settings all other ...........................................................................48
light sectors................................................................... 129 base .................................................................................48
chart orientation ................................................................ 128 custom .............................................................................50
chart presentation models.................................................... 47 standard ...........................................................................48
chart scale and quick access buttons panel .......................... 12 display weather
chart scale panel .................................................................. 12 configure display ...........................................................101
chart updating cyclones.........................................................................104
automatic ........................................................................ 56 ice situation ...................................................................105
log ................................................................................... 57 turn on/off .....................................................................101
manual ............................................................................ 58 displaying database..............................................................29
mariner objects..................................... See mariner objects download weather
review ............................................................................. 57 coastal download .............................................................91
semi-automatic................................................................ 56 custom download.............................................................93
charts catalogue Easy Mode download ......................................................88
chart boundaries by scale level ....................................... 68 overview download .........................................................91
search .............................................................................. 67 scheduled download ........................................................94
setup....................................... See weather download setup chart scale and quick access buttons panel ......................12
subscription..................................................................... 85 functional buttons menu ..................................................13
weather packages ............................................................ 96 functional panels .............................................................13
dynamic licensing................................................................ 32 hotkeys ............................................................................15
activate............................................................................ 32 indicators panel .................................................................8
terms change ................................................................... 33 main window.....................................................................8
view charts...................................................................... 33 on-screen keyboard .........................................................14
Easy Mode weather inverse geodetic problem ...................................................175
download ........................................................................ 88 large media support .............................................................37
setup ................................................................................ 89 licenses
echo sounder dynamic...........................................................................32
diagram ......................................................................... 138 expired before..................................................................31
offset ............................................................................. 138 install from file................................................................31
edit manual update .............................................................. 62 list of installed licenses....................................................31
edit mariner objects ............................................................. 66 manual installation ..........................................................30
electronic range and bearing software modules.............................................................34
from own ship to mouse pointer ................................... 170 licenses from file .................................................................31
electronic range and bearing line licenses list...........................................................................31
between any two points................................................. 169 licensing data .......................................................................30
fix range and bearing at own ship ................................. 169 light sectors display ...........................................................129
from own ship to other points ....................................... 169 lines of position fix ............................................................117
ENC S-57 data accept observed position ...............................................120
import to CM93v3 .......................................................... 38 calculate observed position............................................120
install updates ................................................................. 39 enter observation results................................................119
large media support......................................................... 37 set advanced parameters................................................121
S-63 protection..................................... See S-63 protection set reference points........................................................118
updating .......................................................................... 39 log book
expired before licenses list .................................................. 31 delete page.....................................................................173
export export page ....................................................................173
mariner objects to file ..................................................... 66 import page ...................................................................173
route to device................................................................. 80 play-back.......................................................................174
route to file...................................................................... 79 view entries ...................................................................171
fix position ........................................................................ 171 look-ahead window..............................................................44
functional buttons menu ...................................................... 13 man overboard ...................................................................171
go to waypoint................................................................... 137 manual chart updates
great circle points, calculate .............................................. 176 history .............................................................................58
guard zone ......................................................................... 132 manual licensing ..................................................................30
heading sources ................................................................. 124 manual route planning
history of manual chart updates........................................... 58 create new route ..............................................................72
hotkeys ................................................................................ 15 edit mode.........................................................................74
ice situation display........................................................... 105 plot waypoints .................................................................73
import manual updates
mariner objects to file ..................................................... 67 add object ........................................................................59
route from device ............................................................ 80 edit chart objects..............................................................62
import S-57 to CM93v3 ...................................................... 38 edit updates .....................................................................62
indicators............................................................................... 8 from NtM ........................................................................61
AIS targets display.......................................................... 11 manually update chart objects..............................................62
alarms ............................................................................. 12 mariner objects
ARPA targets display...................................................... 11 create ...............................................................................64
dangers and cautions indicator........................................ 11 edit...................................................................................66
data display type ............................................................. 10 export ..............................................................................66
nav info ........................................................................... 10 import ..............................................................................67
navigation mode................................................................ 9 types ................................................................................62
periodic date.................................................................... 10 measurement units setup......................................................20
position source .................................................................. 8 MOB..................................................................................171
radar display.................................................................... 10 move around chart view.......................................................40
scale status ........................................................................ 9 nav info indicator.................................................................10
source scale....................................................................... 9 navigation calculator
voyage............................................................................. 11 convert coordinates .......................................................176
warnings.......................................................................... 12 direct geodetic problem .................................................175
indicators panel ..................................................................... 8 greate circle points ........................................................176
input/output devices ............................................................ 16 inverse geodetic problem...............................................175
add device ....................................................................... 16 navigation mode ................................................................127
delete device ................................................................... 18 navigation mode indicator .....................................................9
edit device....................................................................... 17 navigational chart settings
monitor serial line ........................................................... 18 best scale mode .............................................................127
inspect ship position .......................................................... 110 chart orientation ............................................................128
install database .................................................................... 28 display palettes ..............................................................128
instruments position ............................................................ 19 navigation mode ............................................................127
interface true and relative motion.................................................129

navigational data sources................................................... 126 copy user permit to file....................................................35
navigational information tools current SA certificate info ...............................................37
AIS................................................................................ 139 uninstall cell permits .......................................................36
anti-collision display................... See anti-collision display SA certificate
ARPA ........................................................................... 146 apply................................................................................36
echo sounder ................................................................. 138 current certificate information.........................................37
radar image overlay ...................................................... 148 safety depth..........................................................................51
navigational panel ............................................................. 125 safety zone .........................................................................132
navigational tools scale chart view ...................................................................41
check points .................................................................. 170 scale status indicator ..............................................................9
ERBL ........................ See electronic range and bearing line scheduled weather download ...............................................94
log book ..........................................................See log book scroll chart view...................................................................40
man overboard .............................................................. 171 semi-automatic chart updating.............................................56
navi calculator............................. See navigation calculator shallow contour....................................................................51
position fix .................................................................... 171 ship parameters ....................................................................19
new version of database ...................................................... 33 ship response .....................................................................110
objects information.............................................................. 43 software modules licensing..................................................34
on-screen keyboard ............................................................. 14 source scale indicator.............................................................9
overview weather download................................................ 91 starting ECDIS.......................................................................8
own ship supplementary chart data .....................................................50
past track....................................................................... 114 synchronization of data
position ......................................................................... 114 indicator ..........................................................................26
secondary past track...................................................... 115 monitor ............................................................................24
sight lines...................................................................... 115 routes...............................................................................26
vector ............................................................................ 115 setup ................................................................................23
own ship parameters............................................................ 19 system check-up ..................................................................21
periodic date indicator......................................................... 10 system information ..............................................................22
piracy information ............................................................. 113 system setup
play-back........................................................................... 174 check-up ..........................................................................21
plot waypoints in chart view ............................................... 73 color differentiation test ..................................................22
position correction............................................................. 123 information......................................................................22
position discrepancies ....................................................... 124 measurement units...........................................................20
position fix ........................................................................ 171 time .................................................................................20
position of instruments ........................................................ 19 updating software ............................................................23
position source indicator ....................................................... 8 user interface language....................................................21
position sources volume.............................................................................21
dead reckoning.............................................................. 117 system warnings indicator ...................................................12
manual position fix ....................................................... 117 terminating ECDIS ................................................................8
position correction ........................................................ 123 text settings..........................................................................53
position discrepancies ................................................... 124 tidal streams.........................................................................82
primary and secondary.................................................. 116 tides .....................................................................................81
print chart ............................................................................ 55 time setup.............................................................................21
quick access buttons ............................................................ 12 true motion.........................................................................129
radar display indicator......................................................... 10 types of mariner objects.......................................................62
radar image........................................................................ 148 updating charts
relative motion .................................................................. 129 by e-mail .........................................................................56
replay................................................................................. 174 log ...................................................................................57
route critical points.............................................................. 77 manually..........................................................................58
route edit mode.................................................................... 74 mariner objects .....................................See mariner objects
route export to file ............................................................... 79 over Internet ....................................................................56
route monitoring review..............................................................................57
mode ............................................................................. 135 updating ECDIS software ....................................................23
panel ............................................................................. 136 user interface language ........................................................21
route plan............................................................................. 76 volume setup........................................................................21
route planning voyage indicator ..................................................................11
automatic ........................................................................ 69 voyage monitoring
critical points .................................................................. 77 mode..............................................................................135
export route to file........................................................... 79 panel..............................................................................136
export to device............................................................... 80 voyage plan..........................................................................76
import from device.......................................................... 80 voyage schedule...................................................................78
manual ...................................... See manual route planning waypoint, go to ..................................................................137
route plan ........................................................................ 76 weather download setup
schedule .......................................................................... 78 configure connection .......................................................97
route schedule...................................................................... 78 E-Mail(Folder Send/Recv) communication type .............99
S-57 to CM93v3.................................................................. 38 E-Mail(Inbox via MAPI) communication type ...............99
S-57 updates........................................................................ 39 E-Mail(Manually via Attachment) communication type
S-63 protection ..................................................................................100
apply cell permits............................................................ 35 E-Mail(SMTP/POP3) communication type.....................99
apply SA certificate ........................................................ 36 Internet(HTTP) communication type ..............................98
cell permits list................................................................ 36 test connection...............................................................100

weather forecast Easy Mode.......................................................................88
alarm areas.................................................................... 108 Easy Mode setup .............................................................89
inspect ship position...................................................... 110 overview download .........................................................91
route comparison........................................................... 109 scheduled download ........................................................94
time series ..................................................................... 106 setup .......................................See weather download setup
weather forecast display subscription ................................. See weather subscription
configuration................................................................. 101 weather packages.............................................................96
cyclones ........................................................................ 104 weather packages .................................................................96
ice situation................................................................... 105 weather subscription
turn on/off ..................................................................... 101 download.........................................................................86
weather forecast download renew...............................................................................87
coastal download............................................................. 91 view.................................................................................87
custom download ............................................................ 93 wind sensor data ................................................................126

Danelec Business System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Danelec Business System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Danelec Business System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Manual for NAVMARINE ECDIS

Last update December 11, 2012 2

Last update December 11, 2012 3

Last update December 11, 2012 4

Last update December 11, 2012 5

1.3 Normative References

Last update December 11, 2012 6

Last update December 11, 2012 7

Figure 1 ECDIS Main window

Figure 2 Indicators panel

¾ Position Source indicator has the following states:

Last update December 11, 2012 8

The currently used position source is a GPS receiver set as the

The currently used positioning method is dead reckoning (see

¾ Source Scale indicator has the following states:

¾ Scale Status indicator has the following states:

There are larger scale charts for the area.

¾ Navigation Mode indicator has the following states:

The navigation mode is on.

The navigation mode is off.

The mariners' objects edit mode is on.

The route edit mode is on.

Last update December 11, 2012 9

¾ Data Display Type indicator has the following states:

¾ Navigation Info indicator has the following states:

All navigation information is displayed. Left-click on the indicator to remove the

No navigation information is displayed. Left-click on the indicator to restore the last

¾ Periodic Date indicator has the following states:

The Periodic date setting is set.

The Periodic date setting is not set.

¾ Radar Display indicator has the following states:

The radar image display is on.

The radar image display is off.

Last update December 11, 2012 10

¾ AIS Targets Display indicator has the following states:

The AIS targets display is on.

The AIS targets display is off.

¾ ARPA Targets Display indicator has the following states:

The ARPA targets display is on.

The ARPA targets display is off.

¾ Dangers and Cautions indicator has the following states:

¾ Voyage indicator has the following states:

The route monitoring mode is off.

The own ship is on the route.

The own ship course deviates from the route course.

Last update December 11, 2012 11

Own ship reached the voyage destination point.

¾ System Warnings indicator has the following states:

There are no caution conditions currently.

¾ Alarms indicator has the following states:

There are no alarm conditions currently. The alarm conditions

If the alarm indicator is flashing red, there is an alarm condition.

2.4 Chart Scale and Quick Access Buttons Panel

Figure 3 Quick access panel

Last update December 11, 2012 12

2.5 Functional Buttons Menu

Opens the Log Book functional panel.

2.6 Functional Panels

Last update December 11, 2012 13

Close panel – closes the panel.